2013 cadillac xts owner manual · cadillac xts owner manual - 2013 - 1st - 4/13/12 black plate...

Black plate (1,1)Cadillac XTS Owner Manual - 2013 - 1st - 4/13/12

2013 Cadillac XTS Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-4

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-44Universal Remote System . . . . 5-50

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-22Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-28Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-42Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-65

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34


2013 Cadillac XTS Owner Manual M

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Cadillac Premium CareMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CADILLAC,the CADILLAC Crest and Wreath,and XTS are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forCadillac Motor Car Divisionwherever it appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20958490 A First Printing ©2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

G : Air ConditioningRefrigerant Oil

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

I : Certified Technician

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

H : Flammable

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses


Introduction v

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

( : Heated Steering Wheel

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

O : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Heated and VentilatedSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-9Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-16Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-18Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-19Active Emergency BrakingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Universal Remote System . . . 1-20Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-22Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-22Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-23Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview


In Brief 1-3

1. Air Vents on page 8‑11.

2. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑6.

Head-Up Display (HUD) onpage 5‑30 (If Equipped).

3. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Turn and Lane-Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑5.

4. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Display. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27.

5. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

6. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑5.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9‑53.

Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑28.

StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑29.

7. Infotainment Display.

Infotainment System. See theinfotainment manual.

8. Glove Box Button. See GloveBox on page 4‑2.

Parking Assist Button. SeeDriver Assistance Systems onpage 9‑42.

9. Electric Parking Brake onpage 9‑26.

Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1.

10. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑18.

11. Cruise Control on page 9‑31.

Adaptive Cruise Control onpage 9‑34 (If Equipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9‑47 (IfEquipped).

Phone Button. See SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

12. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

13. Horn on page 5‑3.

14. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

15. Start/Stop Button. See IgnitionPositions on page 9‑15.

16. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑22.

17. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1.

18. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem (Uplevel) on page 8‑1or Dual Automatic ClimateControl System (Base) onpage 8‑6.

Heated and Ventilated Seatson page 1‑8.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter may be used to lock andunlock the doors from up to 60 m(195 ft) away from the vehicle.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

K : Press to unlock the driver dooror all doors depending on thevehicle personalization settings.See “Remote Lock, Unlock, Start”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.

L : Press and release one time toinitiate vehicle locator. Press andhold for three seconds to sound thepanic alarm. Press again or start thevehicle to cancel the panic alarm.

| : Press and hold to release thetrunk.

Press the key release button nearthe bottom of the transmitter toremove the key. The key can beused for the driver door.

See Keys on page 2‑1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least two seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

3. Press the brake pedal and selectthe ON/RUN/START ignitionmode to drive the vehicle.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.


In Brief 1-5

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do any ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑9.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock a door manually:. From the outside, if the vehicle

is equipped with keyless access,press the button on the doorhandle and pull the handle whenthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is within range. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

. Use the key in the driver door.The key cylinder is covered by acap. See Door Locks onpage 2‑10.

. From the inside, to lock a doorpush down on the door lockknob on top of the door. Tounlock a door, pull once on thedoor handle to unlock it, andagain to open it.

Power Door Locks

. From the inside, press Q or K.See Power Door Locks onpage 2‑12.

. From the outside, press Q or Kon the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Trunk

To open the trunk, pressV frominside the vehicle or on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,or push the touch pad located onthe rear of the trunk above thelicense plate. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 and Trunk on page 2‑14.


1-6 In Brief

Windows

The power windows only operatewith the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑19.

The power window switches on thedriver door control all the windows.Each passenger door has a switchthat controls only that window.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

See Power Windows on page 2‑21.

Seat Adjustment

Power Seats

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the lumbar support:. Press and hold the control

forward to increase or rearwardto decrease lumbar support.


In Brief 1-7

. Press and hold the controlupward to raise or downward tolower the height of the lumbarsupport.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑5.

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑6.

Memory Features

If available, the "1," "2," SET, andB (Exit) buttons on the driver doorare used to manually save andrecall memory settings for the driverseat, outside mirrors, and power tiltand telescoping steering column.These manually stored positions arereferred to as Button Memorypositions.

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat, outside mirror, andpower tilt and telescoping steeringcolumn positions to the currentdriver Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition isplaced in OFF/LOCK. Theseautomatically stored positions arereferred to as RKE Memorypositions.

See Memory Seats on page 3‑7 andVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.

Second Row SeatsThe rear seatbacks can be foldeddown to increase cargo space.

See Rear Seats on page 3‑11.


1-8 In Brief

Heated and VentilatedSeats

Heated and Ventilated SeatButtons Shown, Heated Seat

Buttons Similar

If equipped, the buttons are near theclimate controls on the center stack.To operate, the ignition must be inON/RUN/START.

Press M /J or L /z to heat thedriver or passenger seat cushionand seatback.

Press C or { to ventilate the driveror passenger seat.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The indicator lightsnext to the buttons indicate three forthe highest setting and one for thelowest. If the front heated seats areon high, the level may automaticallybe lowered after approximately30 minutes.

See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3‑9.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessary

while keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3‑2and Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3‑14.


In Brief 1-9

. How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly on page 3‑15.

. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑16.

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑48.

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada

The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑34.

The passenger airbag statusindicator lights on the overheadconsole when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑17.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirror

1. Move the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrows tomove the mirror.


1-10 In Brief

3. Move the selector switch to ) todeselect the mirror.

The vehicle has manual foldingmirrors. See Folding Mirrors onpage 2‑19.

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

The vehicle has an automaticdimming rearview mirror. The mirrorwill automatically reduce the glarefrom the headlamps from behind.The dimming feature comes onwhen the vehicle is started. SeeAutomatic Dimming Rearview Mirroron page 2‑20.

Steering WheelAdjustment

Press the control to move the tiltand telescoping steering wheel upand down or forward and rearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamp

The dome lamp is located in theoverhead console.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF: Turns the lamp off, evenwhen a door is open.

DOOR: The lamp comes onautomatically when a door isopened.

ON: Turns the dome lamp on.


In Brief 1-11

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps located onthe overhead console and over therear passenger doors. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened. To manually turnthe reading lamps on or off:

Pressm orn next to eachoverhead console reading lamp.

Press the button near the rearpassenger reading lamps.

For more information on interiorlighting, see Instrument PanelIllumination Control on page 6‑6.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theturn signal/lane change lever.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

O : Turns off the exterior lamps.The knob returns to the AUTOposition after it is released. Turn toO again to reactivate theAUTO mode.

AUTO: Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.


1-12 In Brief

; : Turns on the parking lamps,together with the sidemarker lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps, andinstrument panel lights.

5 : Turns on the headlamps,together with the parking lamps,sidemarker lamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, and instrument panellights.

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Turn and Lane-Change Signals

on page 6‑5.. Headlamp High/Low-Beam

Changer on page 6‑3.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,move the lever to select the wiperspeed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT: Move the lever up to INT forintermittent wipes, then turn thexINT band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, briefly movethe lever down. For several wipes,hold the lever down.

nL : Pull the lever toward you tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.


In Brief 1-13

Climate ControlsThe climate control buttons and the touch screen are used to adjust theheating, cooling, and ventilation.

Dual Automatic Climate Control (Base)

1. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

2. Fan Control

3. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

4. Air Delivery Mode Control

5. OFF (Fan)

6. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

7. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

8. AC (Air Conditioning)

9. Defrost

10. Rear Window Defogger

11. Recirculation


1-14 In Brief

Dual Automatic Climate Control (Uplevel)


2. Fan Control

3. OFF (Fan)

4. Driver and Passenger Heatedand Ventilated Seats (IfEquipped)


6. Defrost


8. RecirculationDual Automatic Climate Control

Touch Screen (Uplevel)

1. Outside Temperature Display

2. Driver and PassengerTemperature Displays

3. Fan Control


5. AC Mode (Air Conditioning)

6. Climate Control Selection(Application Tray Button)

7. Rear (Rear Climate ControlTouch Screen)


See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem (Uplevel) on page 8‑1 orDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem (Base) on page 8‑6 andRear Climate Control System onpage 8‑9 (If Equipped).


In Brief 1-15

Transmission

Automatic Transmission

Tap Shift

Tap Shift allows the driver tomanually control the automatictransmission. To use Tap Shift, theshift lever must be in M (ManualMode). Vehicles with this featurehave indicators on the steeringwheel. The controls are on the backof the steering wheel. Tap the leftcontrol to downshift, and the rightcontrol to upshift. A Driver

Information Center (DIC) messageindicates the gear the vehicle is in.See Manual Mode on page 9‑24.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)O : Press to turn the system onand off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

RADIO: Press to choose betweenFM, AM, and XM™, if equipped.

{ : Press to go to the Home Page.

MENU: Press to select a menu.

MEDIA: Press to change the audiosource between CD, USB, SD Card,and AUX.

7 : Press to seek the previousstation or track.

6 : Press to seek the next stationor track.

See Overview on page 7‑3 aboutthese and other radio features.

Mixed-Audio Favorites

Favorites can be stored includingradio stations, phone, and tonesettings.


1-16 In Brief

To display the favorites page, pressthe FAV button on the radiofaceplate.

While at the active screen, such asAM, FM, or XM (if equipped), pressand hold the area just above thechrome bar and below one of thepreset screen buttons to save thecurrent station as a favorite. Pressthe area just above the chrome barto recall a favorite station.

From the Settings menu, press theMENU knob to select ManageFavorites. The Manage Favoritesfeature has the option of moving ordeleting a favorite.

Manage Favorites:. Select to highlight a favorite.. Select Delete to delete a

favorite.. While a station is highlighted,

press the MOVE screen button.The screen button will changeto DROP.

. Press the MENU knob to grabthe station tab. Turn the MENUknob and the station tab willfollow the path to the desiredlocation. Press the area justabove the chrome bar and belowthe DROP screen button torelocate the station.

Setting the Clock

See Clock on page 5‑5.

Satellite RadioVehicles with a SiriusXM® satelliteradio tuner and a valid SiriusXMsatellite radio subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast to

coast, and in digital-quality sound.A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

For more information refer to:. www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑9.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)auxiliary input and a USB port in thecenter console under the armrestand in the center stack storage bin.External devices such as iPods®,laptop computers, MP3 players, CDchangers, SD card slot, and USBstorage devices may be connected,depending on the audio system.

See Auxiliary Jack on page 7‑17and USB Port on page 7‑14.


In Brief 1-17

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled cell phoneto make and receive hands-freecalls using the vehicle audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) on page 7‑20 or Bluetooth(Voice Recognition) on page 7‑24 orBluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑18.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

g : For vehicles with OnStar® or aBluetooth® system, press to talk orinteract with those systems. SeeOnStar Overview on page 14‑1 or“Bluetooth (Overview)” in theseparate infotainment manual.

c : Press to decline an incomingcall, or end a current call. Press tomute or unmute the infotainmentsystem when not on a call.

S or T : Press to go to theprevious or next menu option.

y orz : Press the five-waycontrol up or down to go to the nextor previous selection.

SEL: Press to select a highlightedmenu option.


1-18 In Brief

r orq : Press to go to the nextor previous favorite radio station orCD/MP3 track.

x + or x −: Press to increase ordecrease the volume.

See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

Cruise Control

J : Press to turn the system onand off. An indicator appears in theinstrument cluster when turned on.

+RES: Press briefly to resume to apreviously set speed or to increasevehicle speed if the cruise control isalready activated.

SET−: Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control orto decrease vehicle speed if thecruise control is already activated.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑31 orAdaptive Cruise Control onpage 9‑34 (if equipped).

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.It also includes information onsettings and downloadableapplications (if equipped).

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems.

y orz : Press the five-waycontrol to move up or down in a list.

S or T : Press the five-way controlto move between the interactivedisplay zones in the cluster. PressS to go back to the previous menu.


In Brief 1-19

SEL: Press the center to open amenu or select a menu item. Pressand hold to reset values on certainscreens.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑27.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemFCA is intended to help avoid orreduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. FCA provides aflashing visual alert and pulses thedriver seat, or beeps whenapproaching a vehicle directlyahead too quickly. FCA alsoprovides a visual alert if followinganother vehicle much too closely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9‑47.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)LDW is intended to help avoidunintentional lane departures atspeeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater. LDW uses a camera sensorto detect the lane markings. TheLDW indicator, @, appears green ifa lane marking is detected and mayprovide a warning by changing toamber and flashing. In addition, thedriver seat will pulse or beeps willsound.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9‑53.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If available, SBZA will alert thedriver to vehicles in the vehicle'sside blind zone. When the systemdetects a vehicle in the side blindzone, the SBZA display will light upin the corresponding outside sidemirror and will flash if the turn signalis on.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)on page 9‑51.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)RVC displays a view of the areabehind the vehicle, on the centerstack display, when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).

See Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing on page 9‑43.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistURPA uses sensors on the rearbumper to assist with parking andavoiding objects while inR (Reverse). It operates at speedsless than 8 km/h (5 mph). URPAdisplays a warning triangle on theRear Vision Camera screen and agraphic on the instrument cluster toprovide the object distance. Inaddition, multiple beeps or pulsesmay occur if very close to an object.


1-20 In Brief

The vehicle may also have the FrontParking Assist system, a higherspeed Backing Warning System,and the Rear Automatic Brakingsystem.

See Driver Assistance Systems onpage 9‑42.

Active EmergencyBraking SystemIf the vehicle has Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) it also has the ActiveEmergency Braking System, whichincludes Intelligent BrakeAssist (IBA) and the AutomaticCollision Preparation (ACP) System.These systems can provide a boostto braking or automatically brake thevehicle to help avoid crashes.

See Active Emergency BrakingSystem on page 9‑49.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has three accessorypower outlets:. Inside the front storage area

below the climate controlsystem.

. Inside the center console.

. On the rear of the centerconsole.

Lift the cover to access theaccessory power outlet.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.

Universal Remote System

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote system. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another person


In Brief 1-21

available to assist you withprogramming the Universal Remotesystem.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5‑50.

SunroofFor vehicles equipped with asunroof, the ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power (RAP) tooperate the sunroof and powersunshade. See Ignition Positions onpage 9‑15 and Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑19.

1. Sunroof Switch

2. Sunshade Switch

Sunroof Switch

Vent Feature: Press and hold thefront of~ to vent the sunroof. Thesunshade will automatically openapproximately 38 cm (15 in). Pressand hold the rear of~ to closethe vent.

Comfort Stop Feature: Thisfeature stops the sunroof fromopening fully. Press and release therear of~ to open the sunroof tothe comfort open position. Press the

rear of~ again to open thesunroof fully. If the sunshade is notfully open when the comfort featureis pressed the second time, thesunshade will open fully.

Express Close: Press and releasethe front of~ to express close thesunroof.

Sunshade Switch

Open/Close: Press and hold thefront or rear ofQ to open or closethe sunshade to the desiredposition.

Express Open/Express Close:Press and release the rear or frontofQ to express open or expressclose the sunshade. If the sunroof isopened, the sunshade will expressclose within a few inches of theopened sunroof.

See Sunroof on page 2‑24.


1-22 In Brief

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton g located on the centerstack. The appropriate DICmessage is displayed. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑41.

. Press the TCS/StabiliTrak buttong again to turn traction controlback on.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑28.

StabiliTrak® SystemStabiliTrak assists with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. The system turnson automatically every time thevehicle is started.. To turn off both traction control

and StabiliTrak, press and holdthe TCS/StabiliTrak button glocated on the center stack untilg illuminates and theappropriate DIC messages aredisplayed. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑41.

. Press the TCS/StabiliTrak buttong again to turn on both systems.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑29.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an early


In Brief 1-23

indicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑43.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a sparetire and tire changing equipment ora tire sealant and compressor kit.The kit can be used to temporarilyseal small punctures in the treadarea of the tire. See Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit on page 10‑57.

If the vehicle came with a spare tireand tire changing equipment, see Ifa Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑55.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Using the DIC controls, locatedon the right side of the steeringwheel, display REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27. When remaining oillife is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON messagewill appear on the display. SeeEngine Oil Messages onpage 5‑37.

2. Press SEL on the DIC controlsand hold SEL down for a fewseconds to clear the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON messageand reset the oil life at 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition on with theengine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message is not on, thesystem is reset.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑9.


1-24 In Brief

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside ServiceU.S.: 1-800-224-1400

Canada: 1-800-882-1112

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

New vehicles are automaticallyenrolled in the Roadside Serviceprogram.

See Roadside Service onpage 13‑5.

Roadside Service and OnStar

If the vehicle has an active OnStarsubscription, contact OnStar and thevehicle’s current GPS location willbe sent to an OnStar advisor toassess the situation, contactRoadside Service, and relay theexact location to send help.

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-9Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-12Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-16Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-17

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Interior MirrorsAutomatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Rear Window Sunshade . . . . . 2-23

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle witha Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the RKE transmitterin the vehicle, and children orothers could be caught in the pathof a closing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with an RKEtransmitter.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

There is a key inside the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter thatis used for locking/unlocking the

driver door and for locking the rearseatbacks so they cannot be folded.See Rear Seats on page 3‑11.

To remove the key, press the buttonnear the bottom of the transmitter,and pull the key out. Never pull thekey out without pressing the button.

If it becomes difficult to turn the key,inspect the key blade for debris.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

Contact Roadside Service if lockedout of the vehicle. See RoadsideService on page 13‑5.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.



. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Other conditions, such as thosepreviously stated, can impact theperformance of the transmitter.

With Remote Start Shown, WithoutSimilar

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate locking. See “Remote Lock,Unlock, Start” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑44.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock and thedriver door will immediately unlock,if “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out” isenabled. See “Unlocked Door AntiLock Out” under Vehicle

Personalization on page 5‑44. If thepassenger door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2‑16.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors dependingon the personalization settings. See“Remote Lock, Unlock, Start” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44. When remotelyunlocking the vehicle at night, theheadlamps and back-up lamps willcome on for about 30 seconds tolight your approach to the vehicle.The turn signal indicators may flashto indicate unlocking. See “RemoteLock, Unlock, Start” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑44.

Memory seat positions may berecalled when unlocking the vehicle.See “Remote Lock, Unlock, Start”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.



Pressing K will disarm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2‑16.

On some models, pressing andholding K will open all of thewindows.

/ (Remote Start): For vehicleswith this feature, press and releaseQ and then Immediately press andhold/ for at least two seconds tostart the engine from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑9.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release onetime to initiate vehicle locator. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps three times. Press and holdL for three seconds to sound thepanic alarm. The horn sounds andthe turn signal lamps flash for30 seconds, or untilL is pressedagain or the vehicle is started.

| (Remote Trunk Release):Press and hold to release the trunk.

Keyless Access Operation

The keyless access system allowsfor door and trunk to be locked andunlocked without pressing the RKEtransmitter button. The RKEtransmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft)of the door being opened. If thevehicle has this feature, there will bea button on the outside front doorhandles.

Keyless access can be programmedto unlock all doors on the first lock/unlock press from the driver door.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Driver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within range ofthe door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on the driver doorhandle will unlock the driver door.If the lock/unlock button is pressedagain within five seconds, allpassenger doors will unlock.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSimilar

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:. It has been more than

five seconds since the first lock/unlock button press.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has beenopened and all doors are nowclosed.



Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Passenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within range ofthe door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on a passenger doorhandle will unlock all doors.Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:. The lock/unlock button was used

to unlock all doors.. Any vehicle door has been

opened and all doors are nowclosed.

Passive Locking

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this feature allowsfor selecting whether the doorsautomatically lock during normalvehicle exit. When the vehicle isturned off and all doors are closed,the vehicle will determine how manyRKE transmitters remain in thevehicle interior. If at least one RKE

transmitter has been removed fromthe interior of the vehicle, the doorswill lock after eight seconds.

Temporarily disable the lockingfeature by pressing and holding thepower door K switch for severalseconds with a door open. Passivelocking will then remain disableduntil the power door Q switch ispressed, or until the vehicle isturned on.

To customize whether the doorsautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock,Start” under Vehicle Personalizationon page 5‑44.

Keyless Trunk Opening

Press the touch pad on the rear ofthe trunk above the license plate toopen the trunk when the RKEtransmitter is in range.

Keyed Access

For accessing a vehicle with a deadtransmitter battery, see Door Lockson page 2‑10.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Each vehicle can haveup to eight transmitters matchedto it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Keyless AccessVehicles Only)

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.

To program, the vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters, bothcurrently recognized and new, mustbe with you.

1. Open the center console storagearea and the storage tray.



2. Place the recognizedtransmitter(s) in the pocket. Thetransmitter pocket is inside thecenter console storage arealocated between the driver andfront passenger seats.

3. Remove the key lock cylindercap. See Door Locks onpage 2‑10. Insert the vehicle keyinto the key lock cylinder locatedon the driver door handle. Thenturn the key counterclockwise, tothe unlock position, five timeswithin 10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays READY TOLEARN ELECTRONIC KEY #2,3, 4, ETC.

4. Replace the recognizedtransmitter with a newtransmitter. Place the newtransmitter in the transmitterpocket.

5. Press the START button. Whenthe transmitter is learned, theDIC display will show that it isready to program the nexttransmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press Kor Q on the transmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 3–5.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe START button forapproximately 12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.



Programming without aRecognized Transmitter (KeylessAccess Vehicles Only)

If there are no currently recognizedtransmitters available, follow thisprocedure to program up to eighttransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutesto complete. The vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters to beprogrammed must be with you.

1. Remove the key lock cylindercap. See Door Locks onpage 2‑10. Insert the vehicle keyinto the key lock cylinder locatedon the driver door handle; thenturn the key counterclockwise, tothe unlock position five timeswithin 10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DICdisplays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARN,then press the START button.

The DIC display will again showREMOTE LEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

3. Repeat Step 2 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during the nextsteps.

The DIC display should nowshow READY FOR REMOTE# 1.

4. Place the new transmitter in thetransmitter pocket. Thetransmitter pocket is inside thecenter console storage arealocated between the driver andfront passenger seats. Thestorage area will need to beopened to access the transmitterpocket.

5. Press the START button. Whenthe transmitter is learned, theDIC display will show that it isready to program the nexttransmitter.



6. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press Kor Q on the transmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe START button forapproximately 12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak,or if there is interference with thesignal, the DIC may display amessage when you try to start thevehicle. See Key and LockMessages on page 5‑38.

To start the vehicle:

1. Open the center console storagearea and the storage tray.

2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brakepedal and the START button.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

1. Press the button near the bottomof the transmitter and pull thekey out.

2. Use the oval base of the keyblade to separate the two halvesof the transmitter.

3. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.



4. Insert the new battery on theback housing, positive sidefacing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Align the key release button andsnap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartIf available, this feature allows theengine to be started from outsidethe vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during aremote start. The rear windowdefogger may come on duringremote start based on cold ambientconditions. The rear defog indicatorlight does not come on duringremote start.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in view.Check local regulations for anyrequirements.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, do notuse the remote start feature. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.

The RKE transmitter range may beless while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2‑2.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least two seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash. Thisconfirms the request to remotestart the vehicle has beenreceived. If the vehicle's lampsare not visible, press and hold/ for at least two seconds.

During the remote start, thedoors will be locked and theparking lamps will remain on aslong as the engine is running.

The engine will shut off after10 minutes unless a timeextension is done or the ignitionis put in ON/RUN/START.

3. Press the brake pedal and selectthe ON/RUN/START ignitionmode to drive the vehicle.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1 and 2 while the engine isstill running. The remote start canonly be extended once.



When the remote start is extended,the second 10-minute period willstart immediately.

For example, if the vehicle has beenrunning for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a remote start with an extension,are allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must bechanged to ON/RUN/START andthen back to OFF before the remotestart procedure can be used again.

Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To cancel a remote start, do any ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and thenback off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote start will not operate ifany of the following occur:. The ignition is in any mode other

than OFF.. The transmitter is in the vehicle.. The hood is not closed.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.. There is an emission control

system malfunction.. The engine coolant temperature

is too high.. The oil pressure is low.. Two remote vehicle starts have

already been used.. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

. From the inside, to lock a doorpush down on the door lockknob on top of the door. Tounlock a door, pull once on thedoor handle to unlock it, andagain to open it.

. From the outside, if the vehicleis equipped with keyless access,press the button on the doorhandle and pull the handle whenthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is within range. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

. Use the key in the driver door.The key cylinder is covered bya cap.

Key Cylinder Access

(1) Door Handle(2) Cap(3) Slot(4) Key

To access the key cylinder:

1. Pull the door handle (1) to theopen position.

2. Insert the key (4) into the slot (3)on the bottom of the cap (2) andpry outward.

3. Move the cap (2) rearward.

4. Use the key (4) in the cylinder.

To replace the cap:

1. Pull the door handle to the openposition.

2. Insert the two tabs (3) at theback of the cap (4) between theblack seal (1) and the metalbase (2).



3. Move the cap forward and pressto snap the cap into place.

4. Release the door handle.

Power Door Locks

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the actuallocking of the doors.

When Q is pressed on the powerdoor lock switch, the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter isnot in the vehicle, and the driver

door is opened, a chime will soundthree times indicating that delayedlocking is active.

When all the doors are closed, thedoors will lock automatically afterfive seconds. If a door is reopenedbefore five seconds have elapsed,the five-second timer will reset onceall the doors are closed again.

Press Q on the door lock switch

again or press Q on the RKEtransmitter to override this featureand lock the doors immediately.

This feature can also beprogrammed. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑44.

Automatic Door LocksThe doors will lock automaticallywhen all doors are closed, theignition is on, and the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park). The doorswill automatically unlock when thevehicle is stopped and the shiftlever is moved into P (Park).



Use the manual or power door locksto unlock the doors if someoneneeds to exit, and to lock the doorsagain.

The power door locks can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.

Lockout ProtectionIf the vehicle is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/STARTwith the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter in thevehicle and the power door lockswitch is pressed with the driverdoor open, all the doors will lockand only the driver door will unlock.

If the vehicle is off with the RKEtransmitter in the vehicle and thepower door lock switch is pressedwith the driver door open, all thedoors will lock and only the driverdoor will unlock after closing all ofthe doors.

This feature can be manuallyoverridden with the driver door openby pressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When this feature is on and doorlocking is requested with the driverdoor open, all doors will lock andonly the driver door will unlock. Thedriver door must be closed beforelocking is requested for all doors toremain locked. When this feature isoff, the Delayed Door Lock menuwill be available.

This feature can also beprogrammed. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑44.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Pressv { to activate the safetylocks on the rear doors. Theindicator light in the switch willilluminate when activated.

The rear door power windows arealso disabled. See Power Windowson page 2‑21.

Pressv { again to deactivate thelockout switch.



If a rear door handle is pulled whenthe safety lock is deactivated, thatdoor will remain locked and theindicator light may flash. Releasethe handle, then press the safetylock twice to deactivate the safetylocks.

Doors

Trunk

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑21.



Trunk Lock Release

To open the trunk, press| frominside the vehicle or on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,or push the touch pad on the rear ofthe trunk above the license plate.

With the keyless access system,if the vehicle is locked, the keylessaccess transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the trunk for it to berecognized; then the trunk can beopened by the touch pad located onthe rear of the trunk above thelicense plate.

Use the handle to assist in closingthe trunk. Do not use the handle asa tie-down.

If the vehicle is ever without power,the trunk area can still be accessed.

Through the rear seatpass-through door:

1. Fold the rear armrest down andopen the pass-through door. SeeRear Seat Pass-Through Dooron page 3‑13.

2. Reach inward through theopening to locate the emergencytrunk release handle. See“Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle” following.

3. Pull the release handle towardthe front of the vehicle to openthe trunk.

By folding the rear seat:

1. Fold down the rear seatback.See Rear Seats on page 3‑11.

2. Reach inward through theopening to locate the emergencytrunk release handle.

3. Pull the release handle towardthe front of the vehicle to openthe trunk.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Notice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk releasehandle is only intended to aid a



person trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-darkemergency trunk release handlelocated on the trunk lid. This handlewill glow following exposure to light.Pull the release handle toward thefront of the vehicle to open the trunkfrom the inside.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

The indicator light, located on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system.

Arming the System

1. Close all doors, the trunk, andthe hood.

2. Lock the vehicle using thetransmitter or the power doorlock button. The indicator lighton the instrument panel shouldcome on and stay on for about30 seconds.

3. After 30 seconds, or after Q ispressed again, the alarm systemwill arm, and the indicator lightwill begin to slowly flashindicating the alarm is operating.

If a door, the hood, or trunk isopened without first unlocking withthe transmitter, the turn signals willflash and the horn will sound forabout 30 seconds. The alarmsystem will then re-arm to monitorfor the next unauthorized event.

The theft-deterrent alarm system willnot activate if the doors are lockedwith the key.



Disarming the System

To disarm the system, either unlockthe doors using the transmitter,or start the vehicle with arecognized transmitter in thevehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle with the

transmitter after all occupantshave left the vehicle and alldoors are closed.

. Always unlock a door with thetransmitter. Unlocking the driverdoor with the key will not disarmthe alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident,turn off the alarm by pressing K onthe transmitter, or start the vehiclewith a recognized transmitter in thevehicle. The alarm will not stop ifyou unlock the driver door withthe key.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed and the horn chirpsthree times, an attempted break-inoccurred while the system wasarmed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.See Key and Lock Messages onpage 5‑38.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the vehicle isturned off.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the pushbutton startis activated to enter the ACC/ACCESSORY mode or the ON/RUN/START mode and a validtransmitter is present in the vehicle.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

The system has one or more RKEtransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in yourvehicle. Only a correctly matchedRKE transmitter will start the



vehicle. If the transmitter is everdamaged, you may not be able tostart your vehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the vehicle will not change ignitionmodes (ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN/START, OFF), and the RKEtransmitter appears to beundamaged, try another transmitter.Or, you may try placing thetransmitter in the transmitter pocketlocated in the center console. See“NO REMOTE DETECTED” underKey and Lock Messages onpage 5‑38.

If the ignition modes will not changewith the other transmitter, yourvehicle needs service. If the ignitiondoes change modes, the firsttransmitter may be faulty. See yourdealer who can service the

theft-deterrent system and have anew RKE transmitter programmed tothe vehicle.

It is possible for the immobilizersystem to learn new or replacementRKE transmitters. Up to eighttransmitters can be programmed forthe vehicle. To program additionaltransmitters, see “ProgrammingTransmitters to the Vehicle” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ CAUTION

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

1. Move the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrows tomove the mirror.

3. Move the selector switch to ) todeselect the mirror.

Exterior Automatic DimmingMirror

The vehicle may have a driverexterior automatic dimming mirrorthat will automatically adjust for theglare of headlamps behind.

Memory Mirrors

The vehicle may have memorymirrors. See Memory Seats onpage 3‑7.

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)

The vehicle may have SBZA. SeeSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) onpage 9‑51.

Turn Signal Indicator

The vehicle has a turn signalindicator on the mirror housings.The indicator will flash when a turnsignal or the hazard warningflashers are used.

Puddle Light

The vehicle has a puddle light onthe mirror housings. The light willilluminate the ground when the dooris opened.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

The mirrors can be folded inwardtoward the vehicle to preventdamage when going through anautomatic car wash. Push the mirroroutward to return it to the originalposition.

Power Folding Mirrors

1. If the vehicle is equipped withpower folding mirrors, move theselector switch to ) to deselectthe mirror.

2. Press the down arrow to fold themirrors.

3. Press the down arrow again tounfold the mirrors.



Heated Mirrors= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem (Uplevel) on page 8‑1 orDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem (Base) on page 8‑6.

Interior Mirrors

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorTo adjust the inside rearview mirror,hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

The vehicle has an automaticdimming rearview mirror. The mirrorwill automatically reduce the glarefrom the headlamps from behind.The dimming feature comes onwhen the vehicle is started.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.



The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout switch to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys on page 2‑1.

The power windows only operatewith the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑19.

The power window switches on thedriver door control all the windows.Each passenger door has a switchthat controls only that window.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

Express-Down/Up Windows

Windows with the express featureallow the windows to be raised andlowered all the way without holdingthe switch.

Press or pull the switch fully andrelease it to activate the expressfeature.

The express mode can be canceledby briefly pressing or pulling theswitch.

Express Window Anti-PinchFeature

If any object is in the path of thewindow when the express-up isactive, the window will stop at theobstruction and auto-reverse to apreset factory position. Weatherconditions such as severe icing mayalso cause the window toauto-reverse. The window will returnto normal operation after theobstruction or condition is removed.



Express Window Anti-PinchOverride

{ WARNING

If express override is activated,the window will not reverseautomatically. You or others couldbe injured and the window couldbe damaged. Before you useexpress override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

The anti-pinch feature can beoverridden. Hold the window switchall the way up to the secondposition. The window will rise for aslong as the switch is held. Once theswitch is released, the expressmode is reactivated.

In this mode, the window can closeon an object in its path. Use carewhen using the override mode.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the vehicle battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, or is notworking, the front power windowswill need to be reprogrammed forthe express-up feature to work.Before reprogramming, replace orrecharge the vehicle's battery.

To program:

1. With the ignition in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or whenRAP is active, close all doors.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.Repeat the process for the otherwindows.

Window Lockout

This feature prevents the rearpassenger windows from operating,except from the driver position.

Pressv { to activate the windowlockout. The indicator light in theswitch will illuminate whenactivated.

The rear door locks are alsodisabled. See Safety Locks onpage 2‑13.

Pressv { again to deactivate thelockout switch.



If the indicator light flashes, thefeature may not be working properly.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod.

Rear Window Sunshade

On vehicles with a rear windowsunshade, the sunshade onlyoperates with the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑19.

To open the sunshade, press andrelease the switch. The sunshadewill fully extend. To close the

sunshade, press and release theswitch again. The sunshade will fullyclose.

If the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse) when the sunshade isextended, it will automatically close.

Rear Passenger Door Sunshades

If equipped, use the handle to pullthe sunshade up.



Attach it to the hooks at the top ofthe window.

To close the sunshade, use thehandle to release it from the hooksand roll it down.

Roof

SunroofFor vehicles equipped with asunroof, the ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power (RAP) tooperate the sunroof and powersunshade. See Ignition Positions onpage 9‑15 and Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑19.

1. Sunroof Switch

2. Sunshade Switch

Sunroof Switch

Vent Feature: Press and hold thefront of~ to vent the sunroof. Thesunshade will automatically openapproximately 38 cm (15 in). Pressand hold the rear of~ to closethe vent.

Comfort Stop Feature: Thesunroof has a comfort stop featurethat stops the sunroof from openingfully. Press and release the rear of~ to open the sunroof to thecomfort open position. Pressing therear of~ again will open thesunroof fully. If the sunshade is notfully open when the comfort featureis pressed the second time, thesunshade will open fully.

Express Close: Press and releasethe front of~ to express close thesunroof.



Sunshade Switch

Open/Close: Press and hold thefront or rear ofQ to open or closethe sunshade to the desiredposition.

Express Open/Express Close:Press and release the rear or frontofQ to express open or expressclose the sunshade. If the sunroof isopened, the sunshade will expressclose within a few inches of theopened sunroof.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof/sunshade when it is closing,the anti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof/sunshade from closing at the pointof the obstruction. The sunroof/sunshade will then return to thefull-open position. To close thesunroof/sunshade, see “ExpressOpen/Express Close” earlier in thissection.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . 3-5Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Rear SeatPass-Through Door . . . . . . . . 3-13

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-20Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-21Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Airbag SystemAirbag System (Sedan) . . . . . . 3-22Airbag System (ProfessionalVehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Where Are the Airbags?(Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Where Are the Airbags?(Professional Vehicle) . . . . . . 3-28

When Should an AirbagInflate? (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

When Should an AirbagInflate? (ProfessionalVehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-39

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-40Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-45Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-47Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-57


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Front Seats

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button located on the side of thehead restraint, push the headrestraint down, and release thebutton. Pull and push on the headrestraint after the button is releasedto make sure that it is locked inplace.

The head restraint can be adjustedforward or rearward. To adjust thehead restraint forward, grasp thehead restraint and pull it forward tothe desired locking position. Toadjust the head restraint rearward,press the button located on the side



of the head restraint and move thehead restraint rearward until thedesired locking position is reached.Try to move the head restraint afterthe button is released to make surethat it is locked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.

Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The head restraint can be foldedforward to allow for better visibilitywhen the rear seat is unoccupied.To fold the head restraint, press thebutton on the side of the headrestraint.



The head restraint will fold forwardautomatically.

When an occupant or child restraintis in the seat, always return thehead restraint to the uprightposition. Pull the head restraint upand push it rearward until it locksinto place. Push and pull on thehead restraint to make sure that it islocked.

Always adjust the head restraint sothat the top of the restraint is at thesame height as the top of theoccupant's head.

Rear outboard head restraints arenot designed to be removed.

Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.



To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑6.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment on page 3‑5.

Some vehicles are equipped with afeature that activates a vibration inthe driver seat to help the driveravoid crashes. See DriverAssistance Systems on page 9‑42.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the lumbar support:. Press and hold the control

forward to increase or rearwardto decrease lumbar support.

. Press and hold the controlupward to raise or downward tolower the height of the lumbarsupport.

Thigh SupportAdjustment

If available, adjust the manual legextension by pulling up on the lever,and then pulling or pushing on thesupport to lengthen or shorten it.Release the lever to lock it in place.



Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Memory Seats

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the "1," "2," SET, andB(Exit) buttons on the driver door areused to manually save and recallmemory settings for the driver seat,outside mirrors, and power tilt andtelescoping steering column. Thesemanually stored positions arereferred to as Button Memorypositions.

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat, outside mirror, andpower tilt and telescoping steering

column positions to the currentdriver Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition isplaced in OFF/LOCK. Theseautomatically stored positions arereferred to as RKE Memorypositions. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3.

Storing Button Memory Positions

To save positions into ButtonMemory for the “1” and “2” drivingpositions:

1. Adjust the driver seat, outsidemirrors, and the power tilt andtelescoping steering column tothe desired driving positions.

2. Press and hold SET and “1” atthe same time until a beepsounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for asecond driver using “2.”

To save positions into ButtonMemory for theB (Exit) button andeasy exit features:

1. Adjust the driver seat, outsidemirrors, and power tilt andtelescoping steering column tothe desired positions for gettingout of the vehicle.

2. Press and hold SET andB atthe same time until a beepsounds.

Recalling Button MemoryPositions

Press and hold "1," "2," orB torecall the manually saved ButtonMemory positions. Releasing "1,”"2," orB before the storedpositions are reached stops therecall.

If the ignition is in ON/RUN/STARTand the vehicle is parked, brieflypress and release “1,” “2,” orB torecall the Button Memory positions.Placing the ignition in OFF/LOCK or



moving the shift lever out of P (Park)before the stored positions arereached stops the recall.

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or power tilt andtelescoping steering column whilerecalling a memory position, therecall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold theappropriate manual control for thememory item that is not recalling fortwo seconds. Try recalling thememory position again by pressingthe appropriate memory button.If the memory position is still notrecalling, see your dealer forservice.

Storing RKE Memory Positions

Every time the ignition is placed inOFF/LOCK, the vehicle willautomatically store the driver seat,outside mirrors, and power tilt andtelescoping steering columnpositions to the RKE transmitterused to start the vehicle. Thesepositions are called RKE Memorypositions and may be different than

the previously mentioned ButtonMemory positions saved to the “1,”“2,” andB buttons.

Recalling RKE Memory Positions(Auto Memory Recall)

The Auto (Automatic) MemoryRecall feature automatically recallsthe previously stored RKE Memorypositions for the current driver whenentering the vehicle.

Depending upon the Auto MemoryRecall features enabled in thevehicle personalization menu, RKEMemory positions are recalled in thefollowing ways:

To activate the recall when On -Driver Door Open is selected in thepersonalization menu, do one of thefollowing:

. Press K on the RKE transmitterand open the driver door.

. Press K on the RKE transmitterwhen the driver door isalready open.

. Press the lock/unlock button onthe outside driver door handleand open the driver door. TheRKE transmitter must be presentfor the recall to activate.

To activate the recall when On - AtIgnition On is selected in the vehiclepersonalization menu:. Place the ignition in ON/RUN/

START.

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory, power mirror orpower seat controls; or press thepower tilt and telescoping steeringcolumn control.

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or the power tilt andtelescoping steering column whilerecalling a memory position, therecall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold theappropriate manual control for thememory item that is not recalling fortwo seconds. Try recalling thememory position again by opening



the driver door and pressing K onthe RKE transmitter. If the memoryposition is still not recalling, seeyour dealer for service.

Easy Exit Recall

If programmed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, the easy exitfeature automatically moves thedriver seat, outside mirrors, andpower tilt and telescoping steeringcolumn to the Button Memorypositions saved to theB (Exit)button. See “Storing Button MemoryPositions” in this section andVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.

Easy exit recall automaticallyactivates when one of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is turned off and the

driver door is opened within ashort time.

. The vehicle is turned off with thedriver door open.

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or power tilt andtelescoping steering column whilerecalling the exit position, the recallmay stop. Remove the obstruction;then press and hold the appropriatemanual control for the exit featurenot recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the exit position again.If the exit position is still notrecalling, see your dealer forservice.

Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything on

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

the seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.



Heated and Ventilated SeatButtons Shown, Heated Seat

Buttons Similar

If equipped, the buttons are near theclimate controls on the center stack.To operate, the ignition must be inON/RUN/START.

Press M /J or L /z to heat thedriver or passenger seat cushionand seatback.

Press C or { to ventilate the driveror passenger seat.

When this feature is off, the heatedand ventilated seat symbols on thebuttons are white. When a heatedseat is turned on, the symbol turnsred. When a ventilated seat isturned on, the symbol turns blue.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The indicator lightsnext to the buttons indicate three forthe highest setting and one for thelowest. If the front heated seats areon high, the level may automaticallybe lowered after approximately30 minutes.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated andVentilated Seats

During a remote start, the heated orventilated seats, if equipped, can beturned on automatically. When it iscold outside, the heated seats turnon, and when it is hot outside theventilated seats turn on. The heated

or ventilated seats are canceledwhen the ignition is turned on. Pressthe heated or ventilated seat buttonto use the heated or ventilated seatsafter the vehicle is started.

The heated or ventilated seatindicator lights do not turn on duringa remote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated or ventilated seats willnot turn on during a remote startunless they are enabled in thevehicle personalization menu. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2‑9and Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.



Rear SeatsFolding the Seatback

Either side of the seatback can befolded for more cargo space. Fold aseatback only when the vehicle isnot moving.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on top of theseatback to unlock it.

A red tab near the seatbacklever raises when the seatbackis unlocked.

2. Fold the seatback forward.

Repeat the steps to fold theother seatback, if desired.

Raising the Seatback

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.



To raise a seatback:

1. Lift the seatback up and push itrearward to lock it in place.

A red tab near the seatbacklever retracts when the seatbackis locked in place.

2. Push and pull the top of theseatback to be sure it is lockedinto position.

3. Repeat the steps to raise theother seatback, if necessary.

When the seat is not in use, itshould be kept in the upright, lockedposition.

Locking and Unlocking theSeatback

The rear seatbacks can be lockedor unlocked using the vehicle key.

To lock or unlock a seatback:

1. Insert the vehicle key into thelock next to the seatback releaselever.

2. Turn the key toward the front ofthe vehicle to lock or unlock theseatback.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for theother seatback, if desired.

When the seatback is locked, theseatback release lever will not work.The seatbacks cannot be foldeddown when the seatback lock isengaged.

Heated Rear Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns.See the Warning under Heatedand Ventilated Front Seats onpage 3‑9.



Rear Heated Seat Buttons withRear Climate Controls Shown,

Base Similar

If available, the buttons are on therear of the center console.

With the ignition in ON/RUN/START,press M or L to heat the left or rightoutboard seat cushion andseatback. On vehicles without rearclimate controls, an indicator lighton the button will turn on when theheated seat is on. On vehicles withrear climate controls, an indicator onthe climate control display appearswhen this feature is on.

On vehicles without rear climatecontrols, press the button again toturn this feature off. The light on thebutton will turn off. On vehicles withrear climate controls, this featureturns on at the highest setting. Witheach press of the button, the heatedseat changes to the next lowersetting, and then the off setting.Three lights indicate the highestsetting, and one light indicates thelowest.

Rear SeatPass-Through Door

Some vehicles have a rear seatpass-through door in the center ofthe rear seatback. Fold down thecenter armrest and pull the latch toopen the door.

The pass-through door can belocked or unlocked using the knobon the back of the door. Open thetrunk to access the lock. Turn theknob toward Q to lock the door or

away from Q to unlock the door.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areas

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑15.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the



safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑41 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑43.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.



. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑20.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See

“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section for use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.



Adjust the guide so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑15.

Push down on the release buttonand move the height adjuster to thedesired position. The adjuster canbe moved up by pushing the slide/trim up.

After the height adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pressing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a side orrear crash. If the vehicle hasroof-rail airbags, the pretensionerscan tighten the safety belts in arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and possibly other

parts of the safety belt system willneed to be replaced. See ReplacingSafety Belt System Parts after aCrash on page 3‑21.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear safetybelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.



There is one guide for each outsidepassenger position in the rear seat.To install a comfort guide to thesafety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side ofthe seat.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.



Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑15.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑21.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in a

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

crash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.



New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16.

Airbag System

Airbag System (Sedan)The vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A knee airbag for the driver.. A knee airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. Seat-mounted side impactairbags for the second rowoutboard passengers.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For knee airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the lower part of theinstrument panel.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reduce



the risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? (Sedan) on page 3‑30 orWhen Should an Airbag Inflate?(Professional Vehicle) onpage 3‑31.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle or

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

being ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The driver

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

should sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

children and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑41 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑43.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation.

Airbag System(Professional Vehicle)The vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A knee airbag for the driver.. A knee airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:. Seat-mounted side impact

airbags for the second rowoutboard passengers.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For knee airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the lower part of theinstrument panel.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.



Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? (Sedan) on page 3‑30 orWhen Should an Airbag Inflate?(Professional Vehicle) onpage 3‑31.

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keep

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

you in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑41 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑43.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electrical

problem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation.

Where Are the Airbags?(Sedan)

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

The driver knee airbag is below thesteering column. The front outboardpassenger knee airbag is below theglove box.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

On vehicles with second row seat‐mounted side impact airbags, theyare in the sides of the rear seatbackclosest to the door.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



Where Are the Airbags?(Professional Vehicle)

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

The driver knee airbag is below thesteering column. The front outboardpassenger knee airbag is below theglove box.


The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

On vehicles with roof-rail airbags forthe driver, right front passenger, andsecond row outboard passengers,they are in the ceiling above theside windows.



Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

On vehicles with second rowseat-mounted side impact airbags,they are in the sides of the rearseatback closest to the door.


On professional vehicles withoutrear seats, the roof-rail airbags forthe driver and front outboardpassenger are in the ceiling abovethe side windows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

that person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate? (Sedan)Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, and

whether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, inrear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.

Frontal knee airbags are designedto inflate in moderate to severefrontal or near frontal impacts thatexceed a predetermineddeployment threshold.

The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbags

inflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System (Sedan) onpage 3‑22 or Airbag System(Professional Vehicle) on page 3‑24.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof‐rail airbags are intended toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Roof‐rail airbags are not intended toinflate in rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck. Both roof‐rail airbags will inflate when eitherside of the vehicle is struck or if the



sensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over on itsside, or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

When Should an AirbagInflate? (ProfessionalVehicle)Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, inrear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.

Frontal knee airbags are designedto inflate in moderate to severefrontal or near frontal impacts thatexceed a predetermineddeployment threshold.

The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System (Sedan) onpage 3‑22 or Airbag System(Professional Vehicle) on page 3‑24.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is above



the system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Roof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck. Bothroof-rail airbags will inflate wheneither side of the vehicle is struck.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag location, see Where Arethe Airbags? (Professional Vehicle)on page 3‑28 or Where Are theAirbags? (Sedan) on page 3‑26.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk of

full or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? (Sedan)on page 3‑30 or When Should anAirbag Inflate? (ProfessionalVehicle) on page 3‑31.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of the



airbags, see Where Are theAirbags? (Professional Vehicle) onpage 3‑28 or Where Are theAirbags? (Sedan) on page 3‑26.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannot

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

get out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps, turn on thehazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turnoff the interior lamps, and turn offthe hazard warning flashers byusing the controls for thosefeatures.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.



In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑14 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑14.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF or thesymbol for on and off will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or OFF, or the symbol foron and off will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑17.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and knee



airbag, under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag should be allowedto inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in a correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

inflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger airbag andknee airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a childrestraint.



. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag, the off indicatorwill light and stay lit to remind youthat the airbags are off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑17.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags tobe enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbags are active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag,depending upon the person’sseating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety belt properly —whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑57or Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) on page 3‑54.



5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbags for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild's seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure achild restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. Use thefollowing steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enable thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers, alaptop, or other electronicdevices.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”



in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑39 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerfrontal airbag and passengerknee airbag when liquid issoaked into the seat. If thishappens, the off indicator will be

lit, and the airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel will alsobe lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on thepassenger frontal airbag andpassenger knee airbag while achild restraint or child occupantis on the seat. If the passengerfrontal airbag and passengerknee airbag are turned on, theon indicator will be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16 forimportant safety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is put on

an unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑11.



{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing and

diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, front sensors, sideimpact sensors, or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent proper

deployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑34.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10‑52 foradditional important information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13‑3.



Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑16.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags?(Professional Vehicle) onpage 3‑28 or Where Are theAirbags? (Sedan) on page 3‑26.See your dealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑16.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑16. If the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑16.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child



restraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.

{ WARNING

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lap

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

arms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facing

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

child restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, there

are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.



Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑48.

Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety



Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑34 for additionalinformation.



When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, a

rear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. This system is designed tomake installation of a child restrainteasier.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inthe vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the childrestraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors, each rear anchor positionhas a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the cover.

The top tether anchors are underthe covers, behind the rear seat, onthe filler panel. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑47 foradditional information.



Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one child

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑47.

You cannot secure three childrestraints using the LATCH anchorsin the rear seat at the same time,but you can install two of them.If you want to do this, install oneLATCH child restraint in the rightrear seating position, and install theother one either in the left rearseating position or in the centerseating position. If you need to



install child restraints in both thecenter and left rear seatingpositions, the one in the centerseating position will need to besecured using the vehicle safetybelts instead of the LATCH anchors.

Refer to the following illustration tolearn which anchors to use.

There are five lower LATCH anchorsin the rear seat.. Use anchors 1 and 2 when

installing a child restraint usingLATCH in the right rear seatingposition.

. Use anchors 3 and 4 wheninstalling a child restraint usingLATCH in the center rear seatingposition.

. Use anchors 4 and 5 wheninstalling a child restraint usingLATCH in the left rear seatingposition.

Installing child restraints usingLATCH in the center and left rearseating positions at the same time isprohibited.

Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraint

does not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. For outboard rear seatingpositions, put the headrestraint in the uprightposition. See HeadRestraints on page 3‑2.

1.3. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.4. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.



2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

Open the cover to exposethe anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according tothe child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.



If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,raise the headrest or headrestraint and route thetether under the headrest orhead restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,raise the headrest or headrestraint and route thetether under the headrest or

head restraint and aroundthe headrest or headrestraint posts.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system is

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

working properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.



If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑48 for how andwhere to install your child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑48 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Be

sure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑47.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

For outboard rear seat positions,put the head restraint in theupright position. See HeadRestraints on page 3‑2.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑48.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.



Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑47

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑34 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑17 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑34 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑48 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑48 fortop tether anchor locations.



Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator on the passengerairbag status indicator shouldlight and stay lit when thevehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑17.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑34.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Cargo ManagementSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

To access, push on the cover andrelease.

If equipped with storage behind theclimate control system, touch thebottom of the climate control systempanel to automatically open. Thereis a USB port inside. See PortableAudio Devices on page 1‑16.

Keep the storage area closed whennot in use.

Touch the bottom of the climatecontrol system panel again to close.


4-2 Storage

Glove Box

To open, touch the button. Theglove box has a compact disc playerand MP3 connection inside.

Cupholders

Front

Push and release on the passengerside of the cover to open.

Rear

Pull the armrest down to access.


Storage 4-3

Armrest Storage

Front

Push the button and lift to accessthe storage area.

Rear

Pull the armrest down and pull upon the lever to access thestorage area.

Center Console Storage

Push the cover forward to access.To close, push the cover again andrelease.


4-4 Storage

There is storage in the rear of thecenter console; lift the cover toaccess.

The center console has a storagearea in the rear of the console.Press and release the door toaccess. Push the door to close.

There is a power outlet inside thestorage areas. See Power Outletson page 5‑6.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

The cargo tie-downs can be used tosecure small loads and theconvenience net. See ConvenienceNet on page 4‑4, if equipped.

Cargo ManagementSystem

To open the cargo managementsystem, push down on the rear ofthe handle, then lift the handle up.

Convenience NetThe vehicle may have aconvenience net in the trunk. Thenet is attached to the cargotie-downs. Put small loads behindthe net. It can also be positionedinto an envelope to hold smalleritems inside. Do not use the net forheavy loads.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15

Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-18MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-23Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-24

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-25Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-25Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Adaptive Forward Lighting(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-27Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-30

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-35Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-35Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-35Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-36Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-37Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-37Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-37Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-38Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-42Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-42Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-42Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-43Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-44Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-44Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-44

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-50Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

Press the control to move the tiltand telescoping steering wheel upand down or forward and rearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

g (Push to Talk): For vehicles withOnStar® or a Bluetooth system,press to talk or interact with thosesystems. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1 or “Bluetooth” in theseparate infotainment manual.



c (End Call): Press to decline anincoming call, or end a current call.Press to mute or unmute theinfotainment system.

S or T (Previous or Next): Pressto go to the previous or next menuoption.

y orz (Next or Previous):Press the five-way control up ordown to go to the next or previousselection.

SEL (Select): Press to select ahighlighted menu option.

r orq (Next or PreviousFavorite): Press to go to the nextor previous favorite radio station orCD/MP3 track.

x + or x − (Volume): Press toincrease or decrease the volume.

Heated Steering Wheel

( (Heated Steering Wheel): Forvehicles equipped with a heatedsteering wheel, press to turn on oroff. A light next to the buttondisplays when the feature isturned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,move the windshield wiper lever toselect the wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.



INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn thex INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades and windshield before usingthem. If frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑22.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are on LO, HI, or INT, theywill immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to OFF before the driverdoor is opened or within 10 minutes,the wipers will restart and move tothe base of the windshield.

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing, the wiperscontinue to run until they reach thebase of the windshield.

Rainsense™

For vehicles with Rainsense, asensor near the top center of thewindshield detects the amount ofwater on the windshield andcontrols the frequency of thewindshield wiper.

Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

INT (Rainsense Wipe SensitivityControl): Move the windshieldwiper lever to INT. Turn thex INTband on the wiper lever to adjust thesensitivity.

. Turn the band up for moresensitivity to moisture.

. Turn the band down for lesssensitivity to moisture.

. Move the windshield wiper leverout of the INT position todeactivate Rainsense.

Wiper Arm Assembly Protection

When using an automatic car wash,move the windshield wiper lever toOFF. This disables the automaticRainsense windshield wipers.

With Rainsense, if the transmissionis in N (Neutral) and the vehiclespeed is very slow, the wipers willautomatically stop at the base of thewindshield.



The wiper operations return tonormal when the transmission is nolonger in N (Neutral) or the vehiclespeed has increased.

nL (Windshield Washer): Pullthe windshield wiper lever towardyou to spray windshield washer fluidand activate the wipers. The wiperswill continue until the lever isreleased or the maximum wash timeis reached. When the windshieldwiper lever is released, additionalwipes may occur depending on howlong the windshield washer hadbeen activated. See Washer Fluidon page 10‑17 for information onfilling the windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna,StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speedinformation.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again. See CompassMessages on page 5‑35 for themessages that may be displayed forthe compass.

ClockThe infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See “Home Page” underInfotainment in the infotainmentmanual for information about how touse the menu system.

Setting the Time

To set the time:

1. From the Home Page, press theSETTINGS screen button andpress Time and Date.

2. Press Set Time and press + or −to increase or decrease hours,minutes, and AM or PM. Press12Hr or 24Hr for 12 or 24 hourclock.

3. Press } to go back to theprevious menu.



To set the date:

1. Press the SETTINGS screenbutton and press Time and Date.

2. Press Set Date and press + or −to increase or decrease month,day, or year.


To set the clock display:

1. Press the SETTINGS screenbutton and press Time and Date.

2. Press Clock Display and pressOFF or ON to turn the clockdisplay off or on.


Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has three accessorypower outlets:. Inside the front storage area

below the climate controlsystem.

. Inside the center console.

. On the rear of the centerconsole.

Lift the cover to access theaccessory power outlet.

Certain accessory power plugs maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑65.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. The

power outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110 VoltAlternating Current

The vehicle may have a poweroutlet on the rear of the centerconsole. It can be used to plug inelectrical equipment that uses amaximum limit of 150 watts.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN and equipment requiring



less than 150 watts is plugged intothe outlet, and no system fault isdetected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is in LOCK/OFF orif the equipment is not fully seatedinto the outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑19. The power restarts whenequipment using 150 watts or less isplugged into the outlet and a systemfault is not detected.

The power outlet is not designed forand may not work properly, if thefollowing are plugged in:. Equipment with high initial peak

wattage such as:compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supplysuch as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touch sensorlamps, etc.

Cigarette LighterFor vehicles with cigarette lighters,they are located under the climatecontrol system inside the storagearea and on the rear of the centerconsole.

To activate the cigarette lighter,push it into the heating element andlet go. The lighter pops out when itis ready to be used.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Base Cluster Shown, Metric Similar



English Uplevel Balanced Cluster Shown, Metric Similar



Reconfigurable InstrumentCluster

There are four uplevel instrumentcluster display configurations tochoose from: Simple, Performance,Balanced, or Enhanced.

Simple Configuration

The Simple configuration has oneinteractive display zone in thecenter.

Performance Configuration

The Performance configuration hastwo interactive display zones: one inthe center of the speedometer andone in the lower left of the clusterscreen.

Balanced Configuration

The Balanced configuration hasthree interactive display zones: onein the center of each of the gauges.

Enhanced Configuration

The Enhanced configuration hasthree interactive display zones.



Use the five-way control on the rightside of the steering wheel to movebetween the different display zonesand scroll through the differentdisplays.

To change the cluster configuration:

1. Find the Settings page in one ofthe interactive display zones onthe cluster.

2. Press SEL to enter theSettings menu.

3. Scroll down to highlight DisplayLayout. Then press SEL toselect it.

4. Each layout in the menu isrepresented by a small previewimage of the display layout.Scroll up or down and highlightthe selection. Press SEL toselect the desired clusterconfiguration.

5. Exit the Display Layout menu bypressing S.

Cluster Application Displays

The cluster can display informationregarding Navigation, Audio, andPhone.

Navigation

If there is no active route, acompass will be displayed. If thereis an active route, press SEL to endroute guidance or turn the voiceprompts on or off.

Audio

While the Audio application page isdisplayed, press SEL to enter theAudio menu. In the Audio menu,search for music or change theaudio source.

Phone

While the Phone application page isdisplayed, press SEL to enter thePhone menu. In the Phone menu,if there is no active phone call, viewrecent calls or scroll throughcontacts. If there is an active call,mute the phone or switch to handsetoperation.

Cluster Settings Menu

To enter the cluster settings menu:

1. Use the five-way control on theright side of the steering wheelto find the Settings page in oneof the interactive display zoneson the cluster.

2. Press SEL on the center of thefive-way control to enter theSettings menu.

Units: Press SEL while Units ishighlighted to enter the Unit menu.Choose English or metric units bypressing SEL while the desired itemis highlighted. A checkmark will bedisplayed next to the selected item.

Info Pages: Press SEL while InfoPages is highlighted to select theitems to be displayed in the DIC infodisplays. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27.



Display Layout: Press SEL whileDisplay Layout is highlighted tochange the configuration of theuplevel cluster. See “ReconfigurableInstrument Cluster” earlier in thissection.

Open Source Software: PressSEL while Open Source Software ishighlighted to display open sourcesoftware information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs anew cluster installed, the newodometer is set to the mileage ofthe old odometer. If this is not

possible, it is set at zero and a labelis put on the driver door to show theold mileage reading.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operatedwith the tachometer in the shadedwarning area, the vehicle couldbe damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Fuel Gauge

Base Level



Uplevel Balanced Configuration,Performance Similar

Uplevel Simple and EnhancedConfigurations

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

There is an arrow near the fuelgauge pointing to the side of thevehicle the fuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There still isa little fuel left, but the vehicleshould be refueled soon.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.



Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric Base Level

English Base Level

Uplevel Balanced Configuration

This gauge measures thetemperature of the vehicle's engine.

While driving under normaloperating conditions, if the needlemoves into the shaded area, theengine is too hot. Pull off the road,stop the vehicle, and turn off theengine as soon as possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stays



on solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There is a passenger safety beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑34.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind passengers to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.

This cycle continues several times ifthe passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop, or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand/or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System

(Sedan) on page 3‑24 or AirbagSystem (Professional Vehicle) onpage 3‑24.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflate

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

without a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5‑42.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑34 forimportant safety information. Thepassenger airbag status indicator isin the overhead console.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or the on or off symbol, to let youknow the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag are allowed toinflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

On some vehicles the chargingsystem light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on, but theengine is not running, as a check toshow the light is working. It shouldgo out when the engine is started.For vehicles with a reconfigurablecluster, this light may not come onwhen the ignition is turned on.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) alsodisplays a message.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑34.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed in

Service Only Mode, as a check toshow it is working. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Ignition Positions onpage 9‑15.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that there isan OBD II problem and diagnosisand service might be required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system alsoassists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.



Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, stopand park the vehicle. Turn thevehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,and restart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Make sure the capless funnel

adapter is removed, if fuel hasbeen added to the vehicle usingthe capless funnel adapter. See“Filling the Tank With a PortableGas Can” under Filling the Tankon page 9‑57. The diagnosticsystem can detect if the adapterhas been left installed in thevehicle, allowing fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with theadapter removed should turn offthe light.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,



stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑55.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, the

emission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe vehicle is placed in ServiceOnly Mode and the malfunctionindicator lamp does not comeon. See your dealer forassistance in verifying properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop the



vehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light comes on briefly when thevehicle is turned on. If it does notcome on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn if there is aproblem.

If the light comes on and stays on,there is a base brake problem.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

Metric English

The parking brake status lightcomes on when the parking brake isapplied. If the light continues

flashing after the parking brake isreleased, or while driving, there is aproblem with the electric parkingbrake system or another system.A message may also display in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑35.

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light

On some vehicles the serviceelectric parking brake light shouldcome on briefly when the vehicle isin ON/RUN. If it does not come on,have it fixed so it will be ready towarn if there is a problem. For



vehicles with the reconfigurablecluster, this light may not come onwhen the vehicle is in ON/RUN.

If this light stays on, there is aproblem with a system on thevehicle that is causing the parkingbrake system to work at a reducedlevel. The vehicle can still be driven,but should be taken to a dealer assoon as possible. See ElectricParking Brake on page 9‑26. If amessage displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), see BrakeSystem Messages on page 5‑35.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. A chime mayalso sound when the light comes onsteady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, butthe antilock brakes are notfunctioning.

If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑20 and Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑35.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light

For some vehicles with the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) system,this light briefly comes on amberwhile starting the vehicle. If it doesnot, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off. For vehicles with thereconfigurable cluster, this light maynot come on when starting thevehicle.

This light comes on green when thesystem is on and ready to operate.When the system determines that



the vehicle is leaving its lanewithout using the turn signal, thislight will change to amber and flash.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9‑53.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) Warning Light

For vehicles with the ForwardCollision Alert system, this light inthe Driver Information Center (DIC)of the base cluster displays greenwhen a vehicle is detected ahead.

This light will display amber whenyou are following a vehicle aheadmuch too closely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9‑47.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off. For vehicles with areconfigurable cluster, this light islocated in the display area and itmay not come on when the ignitionis turned on.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑28 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑29.

StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the TCS is off, the system doesnot assist in controlling the vehicle.Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTraksystems and the warning lightturns off.



See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑28 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑29.

Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The StabiliTrak or Traction ControlSystem (TCS) indicator/warninglight comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine which

feature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑29 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑28.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

On some vehicles this light comeson briefly while starting the vehicle.If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by the dealer. If the systemis working normally the indicator

light goes off. For vehicles with thereconfigurable cluster, this light maynot come on when starting thevehicle.

Notice: Driving with the enginecoolant temperature warning lighton could cause the vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑14. The vehicle'sengine could be damaged, and itmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never drive withthe engine coolant temperaturewarning light on.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑14.



Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5‑42. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑41.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑44.

Engine Oil Pressure LightNotice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light



This light is located near the fuelgauge and comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on as a checkto show it is working. For vehicleswith a reconfigurable cluster, thislight is located in the display areaand it may not come on when theignition is turned on.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.

Security Light

On some vehicles the immobilizerlight should come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light turns off.

For vehicles with the reconfigurablecluster, this light may not come onwhen the engine is started.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2‑17.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑3.

Automatic High-Beam Light

This light comes on when theautomatic high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) Light

This light should come on briefly asthe vehicle is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer. For vehicles with a



reconfigurable cluster, this light islocated in the display area and itmay not come on when the ignitionis turned on.

This light comes on solid whenthere is a problem with the AFLsystem. It flashes when the systemis switching between lightingmodes. See Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) on page 6‑5.

Lamps On Reminder

The lamps on reminder light comeson when the exterior lamps are inuse. See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhen the cruise control is on andready, and turns green when thecruise control is set and active.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑31.

Adaptive Cruise Control Light

This light comes on when theAdaptive Cruise Control (ifequipped) is active. See AdaptiveCruise Control on page 9‑34.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC is displayed in theinstrument cluster. It shows thestatus of many vehicle systems.

y orz : Press the five-waycontrol to move up or down in a list.



S or T : Press the five-way controlto move between the interactivedisplay zones in the cluster. PressS to go back to the previous menu.

SEL (Select): Press the center toopen a menu or select a menu item.Press and hold to reset values oncertain screens.

DIC Information DisplayOptions

The info displays on the DIC can beturned on or off through theSettings menu.

1. Press SEL while viewing theSettings page in one of theinteractive display zones on thecluster.

2. Scroll to Info Pages andpress SEL.

3. Pressy orz to move throughthe list of possible info displays.

4. Press SEL while an item ishighlighted to select or deselectthat item. When an item isselected, a checkmark willappear next to it.

DIC Information Displays

The following is the list of allpossible DIC information displays.Some of the information displaysmay not be available for yourparticular vehicle.

Speed (Base Cluster): The digitalspeedometer shows the vehiclespeed in either kilometers perhour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).

Trip 1 or Trip 2 (BaseCluster) / Trip 1 or Trip 2 andAverage Fuel Economy (UplevelCluster): The Trip display showsthe current distance traveled, ineither kilometers (km) or miles (mi),since the trip odometer was lastreset. The trip odometer can bereset by pressing and holding SELwhile this display is active.

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. The Average FuelEconomy can be reset along withthe trip odometer by pressing andholding SEL while this display isactive.

Fuel Range: The Fuel Rangedisplay shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. LOW will bedisplayed when the vehicle is lowon fuel. The fuel range estimate isbased on an average of thevehicle's fuel economy over recentdriving history and the amount offuel remaining in the fuel tank.

Average Fuel Economy (BaseCluster): The Average FuelEconomy display shows theapproximate average liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This number is



calculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.The Average Fuel Economy can bereset by pressing and holding SELwhile this display is active.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy:The Instantaneous Fuel Economydisplay shows the current fueleconomy in either liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the fuel economy thatthe vehicle has right now andchanges frequently as drivingconditions change.

Fuel Used: The Fuel Used displayshows the approximate liters (L) orgallons (gal) of fuel that have beenused since last reset. The fuel usedcan be reset by pressing andholding SEL while this display isactive.

Average Speed: The AverageSpeed display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles per

hour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. The averagespeed can be reset by pressing andholding SEL while this display isactive.

Timer: This display can be used asa timer. To start the timer, press SELwhile this display is active. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset. To stop the timer, pressSEL briefly while this display isactive and the timer is running. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold SEL while this display is active.

Compass: The Compass displayshows the direction the vehicle isdriving.

Turn Arrow: The Turn Arrowdisplay shows the next maneuverwhen using route guidance.

Travel Time: The Travel Timedisplay shows the estimated timeduration remaining for the currentroute.

Distance to Destination: TheDistance to Destination displayshows the distance to thedestination when using routeguidance.

Speed Limit: The Speed Limitdisplay shows the current speedlimit. The information for this pagecomes from a roadway database.

Speed Warning: The SpeedWarning display allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warning,press SEL when Speed Warning isdisplayed. Pressy orz to adjustthe value. This feature can beturned off by pressing and holdingSEL while viewing this page. If theselected speed limit is exceeded, apop-up warning is displayed with achime.

Cruise Set Speed: The Cruise SetSpeed display shows the speed thecruise control or Adaptive CruiseControl is set to.



Follow Distance: The FollowDistance display shows the currentfollowing distance to the vehicleahead.

Battery Voltage: The BatteryVoltage display shows the currentbattery voltage.

Oil Life: The Oil Life display showsan estimate of the oil's remaininguseful life. If REMAINING OIL LIFE99% is displayed, that means 99%of the current oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑37. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑6. In additionto the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Remember, the Oil Life display mustbe reset after each oil change. It willnot reset itself. Also, be careful not

to reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, press andhold SEL for several seconds whilethe Oil Life display is active. SeeEngine Oil Life System onpage 10‑9.

Oil Pressure: Available on somevehicles, this display shows the oilpressure in either kilopascals (kPa)or pounds per square inch (psi).

Tire Pressure: The Tire Pressuredisplay shows the approximatepressures of all four tires. Tirepressure is displayed in eitherkilopascal (kPa) or in pounds persquare inch (psi). If the pressure islow, the value for that tire is shownin amber. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑43 and TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑44.

Maintenance Required: Thisdisplay shows how many kilometers(miles) until the next maintenance isneeded.

Blank Page: The Blank Pagedisplay allows for no information tobe displayed in the cluster infodisplay areas.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ WARNING

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

For vehicles with HUD, someinformation concerning theoperation of the vehicle is projectedonto the windshield. The images areprojected through the HUD lens onthe instrument panel.



The HUD information can bedisplayed in various languages. Thespeedometer reading and othernumerical values can be displayedin either English or metric units.

The language selection is changedthrough the radio and the units ofmeasurement is changed throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44 and “Settings” underInstrument Cluster on page 5‑9.

HUD Display on the VehicleWindshield

The HUD information appears as animage focused out toward the frontof the vehicle.

The HUD may display differentalerts and information for vehiclesequipped with these features:. Traction Control System (TCS). StabiliTrak System. Collision Alert. Gap Adjust

. Upcoming Maneuver fromOnBoard Navigation

. Upcoming Maneuver fromOnStar

. Incoming Call

When the HUD is on, thespeedometer reading is continuallydisplayed, except when an imminentnavigation maneuver is beingshown. The current audio, phone,or navigation alert temporarilydisplays if their status changes. Thisoccurs if the steering wheel controlsare used to adjust a setting oracknowledge an alert.

The HUD control is to the left of thesteering wheel.



To adjust the HUD image:

1. Adjust the driver seat.

2. Start the engine.

Use the following settings to adjustthe HUD.

w HUDx : Press to center theHUD image. The HUD image canonly be adjusted up and down, notside to side.

INFO: Press to select the displayview. Release when the desireddisplay is shown on the HUD.If vehicle messages are displayed,pressing the DIC select button mayclear the message. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27.

Brightness: Press up or down andhold to brighten or dim the display.Hold down to turn display off.

There are four views in the HUDdisplay:

Metric

English

Speed View: This displays thespeedometer, speed sign advisor,traffic sign memory, Adaptive CruiseControl speed, Forward CollisionAlert status, Lane DepartureWarning, and follow indicator. Someinformation only appears onvehicles that have these features,and when they are active.

Metric

English

Audio/Phone View: This displaysthe speed view along with audio/phone information. The current radiostation, media type, and incomingcalls will be displayed.



Metric

English

Navigation View: This displays thespeed view along with Turn-by-TurnNavigation information. Thecompass heading is displayed whennavigation routing is not active.

All formats will briefly show theTurn-by-Turn Navigation alerts andprovide details about the nextdriving maneuver. Whenapproaching the next maneuver, the

HUD displays a distance bar. Allnavigation information is provided tothe HUD by the navigation radio orOnStar (if equipped).

Metric

English

Performance View: This displaysthe speedometer reading, rpmreading, transmission positions, andgear shift indicator.

The HUD image will automaticallydim and brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. The HUDbrightness control can also beadjusted as needed.

The HUD image can temporarilylight up depending on the angle andposition of the sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal.

Polarized sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see.

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshield toremove any dirt or film that couldreduce the sharpness or clarity ofthe HUD image.

Clean the HUD lens with a soft clothsprayed with glass cleaner. Wipethe lens gently, then dry it.



HUD Troubleshooting

Check that:. Nothing is covering the

HUD lens.. HUD brightness setting is not

too dim or too bright.. HUD is adjusted to the proper

height.. Polarized sunglasses are

not worn.. Windshield and HUD lens are

clean.

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. See WindshieldReplacement on page 10‑22.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may display one after theother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SEL. The messages thatrequire immediate action cannot becleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.

The following are some of thevehicle messages that may bedisplayed depending on the vehiclecontent.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing features ofthe vehicle that may be noticed. Atthe point that features are disabled,this message displays. Turn offunnecessary accessories to allowthe battery to recharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10‑20.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.



Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10‑19.

BRAKES OVERHEATED

This message is displayed when thebrakes are becoming overheated.This may be seen when driving onhills. Shift to a lower gear.

STEP ON BRAKE TORELEASE PARK BRAKE

This message is displayed if youattempt to release the ElectricParking Brake without the brakepedal applied. See Electric ParkingBrake on page 9‑26.

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed if theElectric Parking Brake is on whilethe vehicle is in motion. See ElectricParking Brake on page 9‑26.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message may be displayedwhen there is a problem with thebrake boost assist system. Thebrake boost assist motor may beheard and brake pedal pulsationmay be felt. This is normal underthese conditions. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.

SERVICE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed whenthere is a problem with the parkingbrake. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

Compass MessagesDashes may be displayed if thevehicle temporarily losescommunication with the GlobalPositioning System (GPS).

Cruise Control Messages

ADAPTIVE CRUISETEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

This message displays whenattempting to activate AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC) when it istemporarily unavailable. The ACCsystem does not need service.

This can occur under the followingconditions:. The radar is not clean. Keep the

radar sensors free of mud, dirt,snow, ice, and slush. Clean theentire front and/or rear of thevehicle. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10‑76.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith the radar object detection orcamera performance.

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control speed is set. SeeCruise Control on page 9‑31.



NO CRUISE BRAKING GASPEDAL APPLIED

This message displays whenAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) isactive and the driver is pressing thegas pedal. When this occurs, ACCwill not brake. See Adaptive CruiseControl on page 9‑34.

Door Ajar Messages

DOOR OPEN

A door open symbol will bedisplayed on the DIC showing whichdoor is open. If the vehicle has beenshifted out of P (Park), a DOOROPEN message will also bedisplayed. If the vehicle is in manualshift mode, the DOOR OPENmessage will be displayed if thevehicle starts to move. Close thedoor completely.

HOOD OPEN

This message will display along witha hood open symbol when the hoodis open. Close the hood completely.

TRUNK OPEN

This message will display along witha symbol when the trunk is open.Close the trunk completely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. The vehicle can continue to bedriven.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADDCOOLANT

This message will display if thecoolant is low. See Engine Coolanton page 10‑12.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —STOP ENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.



HIGH COOLANTTEMPERATURE

This message displays if the coolanttemperature is hot. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑14.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑9, Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27, EngineOil on page 10‑6, and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil levelmay be too low. Check the oil levelbefore filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and thismessage remains on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Engine Oil on page 10‑6.

OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible



Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE KEY WASDETECTED PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE SEEOWNER’S MANUAL FORDETAILS

This message displays when tryingto start the vehicle if an RKEtransmitter is not detected. Thetransmitter battery may be weak.See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

NO REMOTE PRESS BRAKETO RESTART

This message is displayed if theremote is no longer detected in thevehicle. Press the brake pedal torestart the vehicle.

NUMBER OF KEYSPROGRAMMED

This message displays whenprogramming new keys to thevehicle.

REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE

This message displays whenleaving the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter still inside.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the RKE transmitter needsto be replaced.

Lamp Messages

AFL (ADAPTIVE FORWARDLIGHTING) LAMPS NEEDSERVICE

This message displays when theAFL system is disabled and needsservice. See your dealer. SeeAdaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) onpage 6‑5.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROLON/OFF

This message is displayed when theexterior lamp control is in AUTO andthe lights have turned on or off. SeeAutomatic Headlamp System onpage 6‑4.

XXX TURN INDICATORFAILURE

When one of the turn signals is out,this message displays to showwhich bulb needs to be replaced.See Bulb Replacement onpage 10‑23 and Replacement Bulbson page 10‑25.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message is displayed if theturn signal has been left on. Turn offthe turn signal.



Object Detection SystemMessages

24 GHz RADARS OFF

This message displays when drivingin certain areas where there may beradar interference. Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), and the ActiveEmergency Braking System may notwork or may not work as well. Thevehicle does not need service.

AUTOMATIC COLLISIONPREP OFF

This message displays when theActive Emergency Braking Systemhas been turned off. See ActiveEmergency Braking System onpage 9‑49.

AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREPREDUCED

This message displays when theActive Emergency Braking Systemhas been set to the "Alert" setting.This setting disables most automatic

braking functions of the AutoCollision Preparation feature. Somelast-second automatic brakingcapability is still provided with the"Alert" setting, but braking is lesslikely to occur. See ActiveEmergency Braking System onpage 9‑49.

AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREPUNAVAILABLE

This message displays when theActive Emergency Braking Systemis unavailable. The ActiveEmergency Braking System doesnot need service.




FORWARD COLLISIONALERT OFF

This message displays when theForward Collision Alert has beenturned off.

FRONT CAMERA BLOCKEDCLEAN WINDSHIELD

This message displays when thecamera is blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue. The Lane Departure Warningsystem will not operate. AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC), ForwardCollision Alert (FCA), and the ActiveEmergency Braking System may notwork or may not work as well.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNINGUNAVAILABLE

This message displays whenattempting to activate the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) system



when it is temporarily unavailable.The LDW system does not needservice.

This message could be due to thecamera being blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue.

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when theParking Assist system has beenturned off or when there is atemporary condition causing thesystem to be disabled.

REAR AUTO BRAKE ANDPARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE

This message displays whenattempting to activate the parkingand backing features of the DriverAssistance System when they aretemporarily unavailable. The systemdoes not need service.




See Driver Assistance Systems onpage 9‑42.

SERVICE AUTOMATICCOLLISION PREP

If this message displays, take thevehicle to your dealer to repair thesystem.

SERVICE DRIVER ASSISTSYSTEM

If this message displays, take thevehicle to your dealer to repair thesystem.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),Forward Collision Alert (FCA),Active Emergency Braking System,Assistance Systems for Parking orBacking, and/or Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) system may notwork. Do not use these systemsuntil the vehicle has been repaired.

SERVICE FRONT CAMERA

If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the vehicle needsservice. Do not use the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) andForward Collision Alert (FCA)features. Take the vehicle to yourdealer.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Parking Assistsystem. Do not use this system tohelp you park. See your dealer forservice.



SERVICE REAR AUTO BRAKEAND PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the parking andbacking features of the DriverAssistance System. Do not use thissystem to help park or back thevehicle. See your dealer for service.

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT OFF

This message indicates that thedriver has turned the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system off.

SERVICE SIDE DETECTIONSYSTEM

If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the vehicle needsservice. Side Blind Zone Alert(SBZA) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) features will not work. Takethe vehicle to your dealer.

SIDE DETECTION SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

This message indicates that SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) and RearCross Traffic Alert (RCTA) aredisabled either because the sensoris blocked and cannot detectvehicles in the blind zone, or thevehicle is passing through an openarea, such as the desert, wherethere is insufficient data foroperation. This message may alsoactivate during heavy rain or due toroad spray. The vehicle does notneed service. For cleaning, see"Washing the Vehicle" underExterior Care on page 10‑76.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE REAR AXLE

This message displays when thereis a problem with theAll-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System. Seeyour dealer for service.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑29.

SERVICE SUSPENSIONSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the Magnetic RideControl system. See Magnetic RideControl on page 9‑30. Have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). See TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑28.



Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Security Messages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE AC SYSTEM

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the air conditioningsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the power steeringsystem and a chime may sound.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Starting the VehicleMessages

PRESS BRAKE TO STARTVEHICLE

This message is displayed whenattempting to start the vehiclewithout first pressing the brakepedal.

SERVICE KEYLESS STARTSYSTEM

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the pushbutton startsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑44.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑44.



TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

This message displays when thepressure in one or more of the tiresis low.

This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatethe location of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑25.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10‑34, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑41.

You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. TheDIC also shows the tire pressurevalues. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

SHIFT DENIED

This message displays when usingthe Driver Shift Control (DSC) andattempting to shift to a gear notappropriate for the vehicle speedand engine revolutions perminute (rpm). See Manual Mode onpage 9‑24.

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key fromthe vehicle if the vehicle is not inP (Park).

TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.



Vehicle Speed Messages

SELECTED SPEED LIMITEXCEEDED

This message is displayed when thevehicle speed is greater than the setspeed. See "Speed Warning" underDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message may display when thewasher fluid level is low. SeeWasher Fluid on page 10‑17.

Window Messages

OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/PASSENGER WINDOW

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, you willneed to reprogram each frontwindow for the express-up feature towork. See Power Windows onpage 2‑21.

VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls are usedto access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures.

Personalization Menus

1. Press SETTINGS on the Homepage on the infotainment systemdisplay.

2. Press Vehicle Settings.

The following list of menu items maybe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Collision/Detection Systems. Comfort and Convenience. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start



Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following may bedisplayed:. Auto Fan Max Speed. Air Quality Sensor. Auto Compartment Zone Temp. Auto Cooled Seats. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Max Speed

This feature will set the maximumauto fan speed.

Press Auto Fan Max Speed. Pressto select Low, Medium, or High.Press 0 to go back to thelast menu.

Air Quality Sensor

This allows for selection of airquality sensor operation at high orlow sensitivity. Only vehicles withthe dual automatic climate controlwill have this option.

Press Air Quality Sensor. Press toselect Off, Low Sensitivity, or HighSensitivity. Press 0 to go back tothe last menu.

Auto Compartment Zone Temp

This feature allows for selection ofthe compartment zone temperaturesetting when the vehicle isrestarted.

Press Auto Compartment ZoneTemp. Press to select Single Zone,Dual Zone, or Last Setting. Press 0to go back to the last menu.

Auto Cooled Seats

When on, this feature will turn thecooled seats on when using remotestart on warm days.

Press Auto Cooled Seats. Press toselect Off or On. Press 0 to go backto the last menu.

Auto Defog

When set to ON, the front defog willautomatically come on when thevehicle is started. Only vehicles withthe dual automatic climate controlwill have this option.

Press Auto Defog. Press to selectOff or On. Press 0 to go back to thelast menu.

Auto Rear Defog

If equipped, this allows the AutoRear Defog to be turned on or off.This feature will automatically turnon the rear window defogger when itis cold outside.

Press Auto Rear Defog. Press toselect Off or On. Press 0 to go backto the last menu.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/DetectionSystems menu and the following willbe displayed:. Alert Type. Auto Collision Preparation



. Go Notifier

. Side Blind Zone Alert

Alert Type

This feature will set crash alerts tobeeps or seat vibrations. Thissetting affects all crash alertsincluding Forward Collision, LaneDeparture Warning, Adaptive CruiseControl, Parking Assist, andBacking Warning alerts.

Press Alert Type. Press to selectBeeps or Safety Alert Seat. Press 0to go back to the last menu.

Auto Collision Preparation

This feature will turn on or off theForward Collision Alert feature aswell as the Automatic Brakingcapability of the Auto CollisionPreparation feature. With the "Alertand Brake" setting, both ForwardCollision Alert as well as theAutomatic Braking capability of theAuto Collision Preparation featureare available. The "Alert" settingdisables most automatic brakingfunctions of the Auto Collision

Preparation feature. Somelast-second automatic brakingcapability is still provided with the"Alert" setting, but it is much lesslikely to be triggered by most drivingconditions. Off disables all ForwardCollision Alert and AutomaticBraking capabilities of the AutoCollision Preparation feature. SeeActive Emergency Braking Systemon page 9‑49.

Press Auto Collision Preparation.Press to select Off, Alert & Brake,or Alert. Press 0 to go back to thelast menu.

Go Notifier

This feature will give a reminder thatAdaptive Cruise Control provideswhen it has brought the vehicle to acomplete stop behind anotherstopping vehicle, and then thatvehicle drives on.

Press Go Notifier. Press to selectOff or On. Press 0 to go back to thelast menu.

Side Blind Zone Alert

This allows the Side Blind ZoneAlert feature to be turned on or off.

Press Side Blind Zone Alert. Pressto select Off or On. Press0 to goback to the last menu.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Auto Memory Recall. Easy Exit Options. Chime Volume. Reverse Tilt Mirror. Personalization by Driver

Auto Memory Recall

This allows the Auto Memory Recallfeature to be turned on or off.

Press Auto Memory Recall. Press toselect Off, On, On - Driver DoorOpen, or On - At Ignition On. SeeMemory Seats on page 3‑7 or press0 to go back to the last menu.



Easy Exit Options

This allows the Easy Exit Optionsfeature to be turned on or off.

Press Easy Exit Options. Press toselect Off or On. Press 0 to go backto the last menu.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press Chime Volume. Press + or −to adjust the volume. Press 0 to goback to the last menu.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, both the driver andpassenger mirrors will tilt downwardwhen the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.They will return to their previousdriving position when the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse) or theignition is turned to OFF.

Press Reverse Tilt Mirror. Press toselect Off, On, On - Driver andPassenger, On - Driver or On -Passenger. Press 0 to go back tothe last menu.

Personalization by Driver

If equipped, this allows thePersonalization by Driver feature tobe turned on or off.

Press Personalization by Driver.Press to select Off or On. Press 0to go back to the last menu.

Language

Select the Language menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. English. French. Spanish

Press to select the language. Press0 to go back to the last menu.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting. Auto High Beam. Daytime Tail Lights

Vehicle Locator Lights

This feature will flash the exteriorlights when K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed to locate the vehicle.

Press Vehicle Locator Lights. Pressto select Off or On. Press 0 to goback to the last menu.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.



Press Exit Lighting. Press to selectOff, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds,or 120 Seconds. Press 0 to go backto the last menu.

Auto High Beam

This allows the Auto High Beam tobe turned on or off.

Press Auto High Beam. Press toselect Off or On. On some vehiclesselect Off, Normal Sensitivity,or Low Sensitivity. Press 0 to goback to the last menu.

Daytime Tail Lights

This feature allows the taillamps tobe on during the day.

Press Daytime Tail Lights. Press toselect Off or On. Press 0 to go backto the last menu.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Unlock

. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If Off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable.

Press Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out.Press to select Off or On. Press 0to go back to the last menu.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Press Auto Door Unlock. Press toselect Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.Press 0 to go back to thelast menu.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lockswitch on the door.

Press Delayed Door Lock. Press toselect Off or On. Press 0 to go backto the last menu.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Select Remote Lock, Unlock, Startand the following may be displayed:. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats. Passive Door Unlock. Passive Door Lock. Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Press Remote Unlock LightFeedback. Press to select Off orFlash Lights. Press 0 to go back tothe last menu.



Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Press Remote Lock Feedback.Press to select Off, Lights and Horn,Lights Only, or Horn Only. Press 0to go back to the last menu.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Press Remote Door Unlock. Pressto select All Doors or Driver DoorOnly. Press 0 to go back to thelast menu.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the cooled seats onwhen using remote start onwarm days.

Press Remote Start Auto CoolSeats. Press to select Off or On. Onsome vehicles select Off, On -

Driver and Passenger, or On -Driver. Press 0 to go back to thelast menu.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the heated seats onwhen using remote start oncold days.

Press Remote Start Auto HeatSeats. Press to select Off or On. Onsome vehicles select Off, On -Driver and Passenger, or On -Driver. Press 0 to go back to thelast menu.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whatdoors will unlock when using thebutton on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle.

Press Passive Door Unlock. Pressto select All Doors or Driver DoorOnly. Press 0 to go back to thelast menu.

Passive Door Lock

This feature can be turned on or offor used to select feedback whenusing the button on the driver doorto lock the vehicle. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Press Passive Door Lock. Press toselect On, On with Horn Chirp,or Off. Press 0 to go back to thelast menu.

Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder

This feature sounds an alert whenthe RKE is left in the vehicle.

Press Remote Left in VehicleReminder. Press to select Off or On.Press 0 to go back to thelast menu.



Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If the vehicle has this feature, youwill see these buttons with oneindicator light next to them in theoverhead console.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1,1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote system. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist with programmingthe Universal Remote system.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future UniversalRemote system programming. It is

also recommended that upon thesale of the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Remote system buttonsbe erased for security purposes.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-head orgate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate beingprogrammed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in the hand-heldtransmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system, call1-800-355-3515 or go towww.homelink.com.



Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons whilekeeping the indicator light inview. The hand-held transmitterwas supplied by themanufacturer of the garage dooropener receiver(motor-head unit).

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one of thethree Universal Remote systembuttons to be used to operatethe garage door. Do not releasethe Universal Remote systembutton or the hand-heldtransmitter button until theindicator light changes from aslowly to a rapidly flashing light.You now may release bothbuttons.

Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 2 with theprocedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold for five secondsthe newly trained UniversalRemote system button (the

button selected in Step 2) whileobserving the indicator light andgarage door activation.. If the indicator light stays on

continuously or the garagedoor starts to move whenthe Universal Remotesystem button is pressedand released, then theprogramming is complete.There is no need tocontinue programmingSteps 4–6.

. If the Universal Remotesystem indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then turns to a constantlight and the garage doordoes not move, continuewith programmingSteps 4–6.

It may be helpful to haveanother person assist withthe remaining Steps 4–6.



“Learn” or “Smart” Button

4. After Steps 1–3 have beencompleted, locate the “Learn” or“Smart” button inside the garageon the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Thename and color of the buttonmay vary by manufacturer.

5. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button. Afterpressing this button, you willhave 30 seconds to completeStep 6.

6. Immediately return to thevehicle. Firmly press and holdfor two seconds the UniversalRemote system button, selectedin Step 2 to control the garage

door, and then release it. If thegarage door does not move orthe lamp on the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit) does not flash, press andhold the same button a secondtime for two seconds, thenrelease it. Again, if the doordoes not move or the garagedoor lamp does not flash, pressand hold the same button a thirdtime for two seconds, thenrelease.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

To program the remaining twoUniversal Remote system buttons,begin with Step 1 of “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”

Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming

If you have questions or need helpprogramming the Universal Remotesystem, call 1-800-355-3515 or goto www.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be longenough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming a gateoperator or garage door opener byusing the “Programming theUniversal Remote System”procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 2 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” with the following:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Remote system buttonwhile you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-heldtransmitter button until thefrequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. The



Universal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least half of a second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

All programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Remote systemdevice:

1. Press and hold down the twooutside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash.This should take about10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the threeUniversal Remote system buttons:

1. Press and hold the desiredUniversal Remote systembutton. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”

If you have questions or need helpprogramming the Universal Remotesystem, call 1-800-355-3515 or goto www.homelink.com. You mayalso call the customer assistancephone number under CustomerAssistance Offices on page 13‑3.



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Headlamp Leveling Control . . . 6-5Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theturn signal/lane change lever.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

O (Off): Turns off the exteriorlamps. The knob returns to theAUTO position after it is released.Turn to O again to reactivate theAUTO mode.

In Canada, the headlamps willautomatically reactivate when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).


6-2 Lighting

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns the exterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Parking Lamps

Automatic High-Beam System

This system turns the vehicle'shigh-beam headlamps on and offaccording to surrounding trafficconditions.

The system turns the high-beamheadlamps on when it is darkenough and there is no other trafficpresent.

This light comes on in theinstrument cluster when theautomatic high-beam system isenabled.

Turning On and EnablingAutomatic High Beams

To enable the automatic high-beamsystem, with the turn signal/lanechange lever in the neutral position,turn the exterior lamp control toAUTO. The blue high-beam on lightappears on the instrument clusterwhen the high beams are on.

Driving with Automatic HighBeams

The system only activates the highbeams when driving over 40 km/h(25 mph).

There is a sensor near the topcenter of the windshield thatautomatically controls the system.Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

The high-beam headlamps remainon, under the automatic control,until one of the following situationsoccur:. The system detects an

approaching vehicle'sheadlamps.

. The system detects a precedingvehicle's taillamps.

. The outside light is brightenough that high-beamheadlamps are not required.

. The vehicle's speed drops below20 km/h (12 mph).


Lighting 6-3

. The automatic high-beamsystem can be disabled by thehigh/low-beam changer or theflash-to-pass feature. If thishappens, the high/low-beamchanger must be activated twotimes within five seconds toreactivate the automatichigh-beam system. Theinstrument cluster light will comeon to indicate the automatichigh-beam system is reactivated.See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑3 andFlash-to-Pass on page 6‑4.

The high beams may not turn offautomatically if the system cannotdetect another vehicle's lampsbecause of any of the following:. The other vehicle's lamps are

missing, damaged, obstructedfrom view, or otherwiseundetected.

. The other vehicle's lamps arecovered with dirt, snow, and/orroad spray.

. The other vehicle's lamps cannotbe detected due to denseexhaust, smoke, fog, snow, roadspray, mist, or other airborneobstructions.

. The vehicle's windshield is dirty,cracked, or obstructed bysomething that blocks the viewof the light sensor.

. The vehicle is loaded such thatthe front end points upward,causing the light sensor to aimhigh and not detect headlampsand taillamps.

. Driving on winding or hilly roads.

The automatic high-beamheadlamps may need to be disabledif any of the above conditions exist.

This feature can be turned on or offor the sensitivity can be changed invehicle personalization. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑44.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened while the ignition isoff and the exterior lamps are on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger): Push the turn and lanechange lever away from you andrelease, to turn the high beams on.To return to low beams, push thelever again or pull it toward you andrelease.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.


6-4 Lighting

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull theturn and lane-change lever towardyou, and release.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

For vehicles with High IntensityDischarge (HID) headlamps, thededicated DRL will come on whenall of the following conditionsare met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamp control is

in AUTO.. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.. The parking brake is released or

the vehicle is not in P (Park).

When the DRL are on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, instrument panellights, and other lamps will notbe on.

The DRL turn off when theheadlamps are turned to O or theignition is off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control isset to AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.

There is a light sensor located ontop of the instrument panel. Do notcover the sensor.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will turn off or maychange to Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned to O or the ignitionis off.

For vehicles sold in Canada, thiscontrol only works when thetransmission is in P (Park).

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toP


Lighting 6-5

or; to disable this feature.

Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL)For vehicles with uplevelheadlamps, the AFL system adjuststhe headlamps to provide greaterroad illumination in various drivingconditions.

To enable AFL, set the exterior lampcontrol to the AUTO position.Moving the control out of the AUTOposition will deactivate the system.AFL will operate when the vehiclespeed is greater than 3 km/h(2 mph). AFL will not operate whenthe transmission is in R (Reverse).AFL is not immediately operableafter starting the vehicle; driving ashort distance is required tocalibrate the AFL. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑1.

Curve Lighting

The light beam pivots based on thesteering wheel position and vehiclespeed of at least 10 km/h (6 mph).

The headlamps shine at an angle ofup to 15 degrees to the right or leftof the direction of travel.

Headlamp LevelingControlAutomatic Headlamp Leveling

For vehicles with headlamp leveling,the range of the headlamps isadjusted automatically based onvehicle load.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flashers):Press this button located on thecenter stack to make the front andrear turn signal lamps flash on andoff. Press again to turn theflashers off.

The hazard warning flashers turn onautomatically if the airbags deploy.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.


6-6 Lighting

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The turn and lane-change signalcan be turned off manually bymoving the lever back to its originalposition.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange, the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmight be burned out.

Replace any burned out bulbs. If abulb is not burned out, check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑26.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

The brightness of the instrumentpanel lighting and steering wheelcontrols can be adjusted.

D (Instrument PanelIllumination): Move thethumbwheel up or down to brightenor dim the lights.

The brightness of the displaysautomatically adjusts based onoutdoor lighting. The instrument

panel illumination control will set thelowest level that the displays willautomatically be adjusted.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps come on whenany door is opened and the domelamp is in the DOOR position.

Dome LampsThe dome lamp is in the overheadconsole.


Lighting 6-7

To change the dome lamp settings,press:

OFF: Turns the lamp off, evenwhen a door is open.

DOOR: The lamp comes on whena door is opened.

ON: Turns the lamp on.

Reading LampsThere are reading lamps located onthe overhead console and over therear passenger doors. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened. To manually turnthe reading lamps on or off:

Pressm orn next to eachoverhead console reading lamp.

Press the button near the rearpassenger reading lamps.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, back-up lamps, outsidemirror lamps, exterior door handlelamps, dome lamp, and most of theinterior lights turn on briefly when Kis pressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.When the driver door is opened, allcontrol lights, Driver InformationCenter (DIC) lights, and door pocketlights turn on. After about30 seconds the exterior lamps turnoff, then the dome lamp andremaining interior lights dim to off.Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by changing the ignitionout of the OFF position, or bypressing Q on the RKE transmitter.


6-8 Lighting

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.

Exit LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, parkinglamps, back-up lamps, outsidemirror lamps, license plate lamps,and exterior door handle lampscome on at night, or in areas withlimited lighting, when a door isopened after the ignition is turnedoff. The dome lamp comes on afterthe ignition is changed to the OFFposition. The exterior lamps anddome lamp remain on after the dooris closed for a set amount of time,then automatically turn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.

If some interior lamps are left onand the ignition is turned off, thebattery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off aftersome time.

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverThe exterior lamps turn off about10 minutes after the ignition isturned off, if the parking lamps orheadlamps have been manually lefton. This protects against drainingthe battery. To restart the 10-minutetimer, turn the exterior lamp controlto the off position and then back tothe parking lamp or headlampposition.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be inthe ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-18Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with theinfotainment system featured in thisowner manual.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the roadfor too long or too often whileusing any infotainment featurescan cause a crash resulting ininjury or death. Do not giveextended attention toinfotainment tasks whiledriving. Focus your attentionon driving and limit glances tothe instrument cluster or centerstack screens. Use voiceguidance whenever possible.

The infotainment system has built-infeatures intended to help with thisby disabling some functions when


7-2 Infotainment System

driving. A grayed-out function is notavailable when the vehicle ismoving. All functions are availablewhen the vehicle is parked.

Before driving:. Become familiar with the

infotainment system operationand buttons on the faceplate.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.

. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can be calledeasily by pressing a singlebutton or by using a single voicecommand for vehicles equippedwith phone capability.

See Defensive Driving on page 9‑3.

This vehicle’s infotainment systemmay be equipped with a noisereduction system which can workimproperly if the audio amplifier,engine calibrations, exhaust system,microphones, radio, or speakers are

modified or replaced. This couldresult in more noticeable enginenoise at certain speeds.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑19.

The base radio is included in thismanual. See the separate CUEinfotainment manual for informationon the CUE radio, audio players,phone, navigation system, andvoice or speech recognition. Thereis also information on settings anddownloadable applications (ifequipped).

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.



Overview

Infotainment System OverviewThe infotainment system is controlled by using the buttons on the faceplateand steering wheel controls.

1. FAV (Favorite Pages). Press to scroll through the

favorite pages for eachsource.

2. O (Power/Volume)

. Press to turn the audio onor off.

. Press and hold to clear thescreen and displaythe time.

. Press to mute the system.Press again to unmute.

. Turn the knob to adjust thevolume.

3. 7 (Seek Previous/FastReverse). Press to seek to the

beginning of the current orprevious track. If the trackhas been playing for lessthan five seconds, it seeksthe previous track. If longerthan five seconds, thecurrent track starts from thebeginning.

. Press and hold to quicklyreverse through a track.Release the button to returnto playing speed. See CDPlayer on page 7‑11.

. For AM, FM, or XM (ifequipped), press to seek tothe previous strong station.



4. 6 (Seek Next/Fast Forward)

. Press to seek the nexttrack.

. Press and hold to fastforward through a track.Release the button to returnto playing speed. See CDPlayer on page 7‑11.

. For AM, FM, or XM (ifequipped), press to seek tothe next strong station.

5. MENU. Press to access the menu

for the current audiosource.

. Press to select thehighlighted menu option.

. Turn to scroll through a list.

6. { (Home Page)

. See “Home Page” followingin this section.

7. RADIO. Press to change the audio

source between AM, FM,or XM (if equipped).

8. MEDIA. Press to change the audio

source between CD, USB,SD Card, and AUX.

9. PHONE. See Bluetooth (Infotainment

Controls) on page 7‑20 orBluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑24or Bluetooth (Overview) onpage 7‑18.

10. S BACK

. Press to return to theprevious screen ina menu.

. On a page accesseddirectly by a faceplatebutton or Home Pagescreen button, press SBACK to go to theprevious menu.

Home Page

Home Page Features

The infotainment system displays aHome Page that makes it easy toaccess all of the applications. Turnthe MENU knob to highlight featureicons. Press the MENU knob toaccess the feature’s options.

Various functions are disabled whenthe vehicle is moving.

AUDIO: Select the AUDIO screenicon to display the active sourcepage. The sources available areAM, FM, XM (if equipped), CD,USB/iPod, AUX, and SD Card. SeeAM-FM Radio on page 7‑7, SatelliteRadio on page 7‑9, CD Player onpage 7‑11, and Auxiliary Jack onpage 7‑17.

PHONE: Select the PHONE screenicon to display the Phone mainpage. See “PHONE” in this section.



SETTINGS: Select the SETTINGSscreen icon to display the Settingsmain page. See “Setting RadioPreferences” in this section.

Setting Radio Preferences

Select the SETTINGS screen iconto display the Settings menu andthe following may display:

Time: See Clock on page 5‑5.

Language (Current Language):This will set the display language inthe radio, instrument cluster, andvoice recognition. Select to displaya list of languages. Select S BACKto go back to the previous menu.

Valet Mode:

1. Type a four-digit code on thecircular numeric keypad. Turnthe MENU knob to highlight anumber.

2. Press the MENU knob to selectit. Do this for each one of thefour digits. Select Enter to go tothe confirmation screen.

3. Re-enter the four-digit code.Select LOCK to lock the system.This will also lock the vehiclestorage locations, if equipped.

4. Type the four-digit code tounlock the system. Select SBACK to go back to theprevious menu.

Radio: See “Radio Setup” later inthis section.

Vehicle: See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑44.

Display: Press the MENU knob toturn the display on or off.

Return to Factory Settings: See“Return to Factory Settings” later inthis section.

Software Information: Press theMENU knob to select Save VehicleInfo to USB. Press the MENU knobagain to start downloading thevehicle information to the USB.

Radio Setup

From the RADIO screen icon, thefollowing may be displayed:

Manage Favorites:. Select to highlight a favorite.. Select Delete to delete a

favorite.. While a station is highlighted,

press the MOVE screen button.The screen button will changeto DROP.

. Press the MENU knob to grabthe station tab. Turn the MENUknob and the station tab willfollow the path to the desiredlocation. Press the area justabove the chrome bar and belowthe DROP screen button torelocate the station.

Number of Favorites Shown: Toset the number of favorites fordisplay, select Auto to automaticallyshow all the favorites, or select anumber from 5–25 to show that



selection of favorites. Select SBACK to go back to theprevious menu.

Audible Touch Feedback: SelectAudible Touch Feedback to turnfeedback Off or On. Select S BACKto go back to the previous menu.

Auto Volume (If Equipped): Thisfeature adjusts the volume based onvehicle speed. The options are Off,Low, Medium-Low, Medium,Medium-High, or High. Select thedesired volume. Select S BACK togo back to the previous menu.

Bose AudioPilot® (If Equipped):This feature adjusts the volumebased on the noise in the vehicle.The options are On or Off.

Maximum Startup Volume: Thisfeature sets the maximum startupvolume. If the vehicle is started andthe volume is greater than this level,the volume is adjusted to this level.To set the maximum startup volume,Turn the MENU knob to increase or

decrease startup volume. Select SBACK to go back to theprevious menu.

Rear Camera (If Equipped)

From the Rear Camera screenbutton, the following may bedisplayed:

Rear Camera Display: Thisfeature will turn the Rear VisionCamera display on or off. SelectRear Camera Display and thenselect Off or On. Select S BACK togo back to the previous menu.

Park Assist Symbols: This featurewill display symbols where objectsare detected by the Rear ParkingAssist system. Select Park AssistSymbols, then select Off or On.Select S BACK to go back to theprevious menu.

See Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing on page 9‑43.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert: Thisfeature will display an alert iconwhen cross traffic is detected.

Select Rear Cross Traffic Alert, thenselect Off or On. Select S BACK togo back to the previous menu.

Return to Factory Settings

Select Return to Factory Settingsand the following list may display:

Restore Vehicle Settings: Thisoption will restore factory vehiclepersonalization settings. SelectRestore Vehicle Settings. A screendisplays stating all vehiclecustomization settings will berestored to the factory settings.Select Cancel or Confirm. Select SBACK to go back to the last menu.

Clear All Private Data: This optionclears all private information fromthe vehicle. Select Clear All PrivateData. Select Cancel or Continue.Select S BACK to go back to thelast menu.

Restore Radio Settings: Thisoption will restore factory radiosettings. Select Restore RadioSettings. A screen displays stating



all personalized radio settings willbe restored back to the factorysettings. Select Cancel or Confirm.Select S BACK to go back to thelast menu.

English and Metric UnitConversion

To change the display units betweenEnglish and metric units, seeInstrument Cluster on page 5‑9.

Software UpdatesSee the following websites forinformation:

Cadillac

In the U.S., see www.cadillac.com.

In Canada, see www.cadillac.ca.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Playing the Radio

While on the audio main page,press the RADIO or MEDIA buttonrepeatedly to display and scrollthrough the available sources (AM,FM, and XM (if equipped), CD, USB,SD, and AUX).

The steering wheel controls canalso be used to adjust the volume.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

AM, FM, XM (If Equipped)

To select AM, FM, XM (if equipped):

1. Press {.

2. Turn the MENU knob to highlightthe AUDIO screen icon.

3. Press the MENU knob to select.

4. Turn the MENU knob to highlighteither AM, FM, or XM (ifequipped) and press the MENUto select.

Pressing the RADIO faceplatebutton is another way to changefrom a different source, to AM, FM,or XM (if equipped).

Press the RADIO faceplate buttonto display the active radio source.Press the MENU knob and thefollowing radio settings may display:

Tone Settings:. Bass, Midrange, and Treble:

Turn the MENU knob andhighlight. Press the MENU knobto select. Turn the MENU knobto adjust.

. Balance: Turn the MENU knobto highlight. Press the MENUknob to select. Turn the MENUknob left for more sound fromthe left speakers or right formore sound from the right



speakers. The middle positionbalances the sound between theleft and right speakers.

. Fade: Turn the MENU knob tohighlight. Press the MENU knobto select. Turn the MENU knobto the left for more sound fromthe front speakers and to theright for more sound from therear speakers. The middleposition balances the soundbetween the front and rearspeakers.

. EQ (Equalizer): Turn the MENUknob to highlight. Turn theMENU knob to scroll through theoptions. Press the MENU knobto select. Press the S BACKbutton to go back to theprevious menu.

Station List: Select to display a listof AM or FM stations. Press SBACK to go to the previous menu.

Auto Volume: If equipped, thisfeature adjusts the volume based onthe vehicle speed. Select the level

between off, low, medium-low,medium, medium-high, and high.Press S BACK to go to theprevious menu.

Bose AudioPilot: If equipped, thisfeature adjusts the volume based onthe noise in the vehicle. Whenturned on, AudioPilot detects noiseand vehicle speed to continuouslyadjust the audio signal so that musicwill sound the same at a set volumelevel. This feature is most effectiveat lower radio volume settingswhere background noise can affecthow well the music is being played.See www.bose.com/audiopilot. Thisfeature can be turned On or Off.

Options for SiriusXM Only

XM View: Select to displayChannel List in XM source. Turn theMENU knob to highlight and pressthe MENU knob to select. Press SBACK to go to the previous menu.

Channel List: Select to display alist of SiriusXM stations. Turn theMENU knob to highlight and pressthe MENU knob to select. Press SBACK to go to the previous menu.

Also see the radio settings commonfor all sources earlier in this section.

Finding a Station

Seeking a Station

Press7 or6 to search for theprevious or next strongest station.

Tuning a Station

Turn the MENU knob to manuallyfind a station.

Storing Radio Station Presets

Favorites are stored in the favoritesarea at the bottom of the screen.

Press { to display the Home Page.Turn the MENU knob to highlightAUDIO. Press the MENU knob toaccess the active audio sourcemain page.



Up to 25 preset stations can bestored under the following:

AM, FM, or XM (if equipped):While on the active source mainpage, such as AM, FM, and XM (ifequipped), press and hold the areajust above the chrome bar andbelow one of the preset screenbuttons to save the current stationas a favorite. Press the area justabove the chrome bar to recall afavorite station.

Mixed-Audio Favorites

Favorites can be stored includingradio stations.

To display the favorites page, pressthe FAV button on the radiofaceplate.

From the Settings menu press theMENU knob to select ManageFavorites. The Manage Favoritesfeature has the option of moving ordeleting a favorite. See “ManageFavorites” under Overview onpage 7‑3.

Satellite Radio

SiriusXM® Satellite RadioService

Vehicles with a SiriusXM satelliteradio tuner and a valid SiriusXMsatellite radio subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A service fee is required to receivethe SiriusXM service. Seewww.siriusxm.com or call1-866-635-2349 in the U.S. InCanada, see www.siriusxmradio.caor call 1-877-209-0079.

When SirisuXM is active, thechannel name and number, songtitle, and artist display on thescreen.

Browsing SiriusXM Channels

To browse the SiriusXM channels:

1. While XM is the active source,press the MENU knob.

2. Turn the MENU knob to highlightXM Channel List. Press theMENU knob to select.

3. Turn the MENU knob to highlightAll XM Channels. Press theMENU knob to select anddisplay all channels or select acategory.

SiriusXM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These stations, or anyothers, can be blocked by request,by calling 1-866-635-2349 in theU.S., and 1-877-209-0079 inCanada.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed.

Channel Off Air: This station is notcurrently in service.



Channel Unauth: This station isblocked or cannot be received.

Channel Not Available: Thispreviously assigned station is nolonger assigned.

No XM Signal/Reception May BeBlocked: The vehicle may be in alocation where the XM signal isbeing blocked. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to station 0,this message displays with the XMradio eight-digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can also occur

when things like storms and powerlines interfere with radio reception.When this happens, try reducing thetreble on the radio.

SiriusXM® Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Serviceprovides digital radio reception. Tallbuildings or hills can interfere withsatellite radio signals, causing thesound to fade in and out. Inaddition, traveling or standing underheavy foliage, bridges, garages,or tunnels may cause loss of theSiriusXM signal for a period of time.

Cell Phone Usage

Cell phone usage, such as makingor receiving phone calls, charging,or just having the phone on maycause static interference in theradio. Unplug the phone or turn it offif this happens.



Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger in therear window. Do not scratch theinside surface or damage the linesin the glass. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radioreception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached to thepost on the glass.

If attaching a cell phone antenna tothe glass, attach it between the gridlines.

Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the insiderear window can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radio

reception. Any damage caused tothe backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Multi-Band AntennaThe roof antenna is for OnStar,SiriusXM Satellite Radio, and GPS(Global Positioning System). Keepclear of obstructions for clearreception. If the vehicle has asunroof, and it is open, receptioncan also be affected.

Audio Players

CD PlayerThe player can be used for CD andMP3 audio.

With the vehicle on, insert a discinto the slot, label side up. Press theMEDIA button to select CD as asource.

The system is capable of playing:. Most audio CDs. CD-R. CD-RW. MP3 or unprotected WMA

formats

When playing any compatiblerecordable disc, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to disc quality,the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has beenrecorded, or the way the disc hasbeen handled.



There can be increased skipping,difficulty in recording tracks,difficulty in finding tracks, and/ordifficulty in loading and ejecting.If these problems occur, check thedisc for damage or try a knowngood disc.

To avoid damage to the CD player:. Do not use scratched or

damaged discs.. Do not apply labels to discs. The

labels could get caught in theplayer.

. Insert only one disc at a time.

. Keep the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

. Use a marking pen to label thetop of the disc.

Loading and Ejecting Discs

To load a disc:

1. Turn the vehicle on.

2. Insert a disc into the slot, labelside up. The player pulls it in therest of the way. If the disc isdamaged or improperly loaded,there is an error and the discejects.

Playing an Audio CD

Press the MEDIA button on thefaceplate until CD is selected.

On the CD main page, a tracknumber displays at the beginning ofeach track. Song, Artist, and Albuminformation displays when available.

Use the following controls to playthe disc:

t or7 (Seek Previous/FastReverse): While on the CD mainpage, press just above the chromebar and below thet.

. Press to seek to the beginning ofthe current or previous track.If the track has been playing forless than five seconds, it seeks

to the previous track. If longerthan five seconds, the currenttrack starts from the beginning.

. Press and hold to fast reversethrough a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

u or6 (Seek Next/FastForward): While on the CD mainpage, press just above the chromebar and below theu.

. Press to seek to the next track.

. Press and hold to fast forwardthrough a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

j /r (Pause/Play): While on the CDmain page. Press just above thechrome bar and below pause/play topause. Press again to resume.

Z (Shuffle): Press just above thechrome bar and below theZ toplay the songs in random order.Press again to turn off.



If a Blu-ray Disc™ or DVD disc isloaded into the CD player and theCD screen button is selected, amessage comes on the screen touse the Video application. TheVideo application is only availableon vehicles with rear seatentertainment.

CD Menu

While on the CD main page, pressthe MENU knob to display the CDmenu and the following may display:

Browse: Select to display the filesor songs on the CD. See “BrowseCD Media” later in this section.

Tone Settings: Select to adjustBass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See“Tone Settings” under AM-FM Radioon page 7‑7.

Auto Volume: If equipped, thisfeature adjusts the volume based onthe vehicle speed. Select the levelbetween off, low, medium-low,

medium, medium-high, and high.Press S BACK to go to theprevious menu.

Bose AudioPilot: If equipped, thisfeature adjusts the volume based onthe noise in the vehicle. Whenturned on, AudioPilot detects noiseand vehicle speed to continuouslyadjust the audio signal so that musicwill sound the same at a set volumelevel. This feature is most effectiveat lower radio volume settingswhere background noise can affecthow well the music is being played.See www.bose.com/audiopilot. Thisfeature can be turned on or off.

Browse CD Media

Use to browse the track list ona CD.

Error Messages

If Disc Error displays and/or the disccomes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:. The disc has an invalid or

unknown format.

. The disc is very hot. Try the discagain when the temperaturereturns to normal.

. The road is very rough. Try thedisc again when the road issmoother.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. Try thedisc again later.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If Disc Player Error displays, it couldbe for one of the following reasons:. The player temperature is

too high.. There are load or eject errors.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error continues, contact yourdealer.



Playing an MP3 CD

To play an MP3 CD, follow the sameinstructions as “Playing anAudio CD.”

The following guidelines must bemet when creating an MP3 disc,otherwise the CD might not play:. Sampling rate: 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.

. Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,and 320 kbps.

. Maximum number of folders:eight folders with 255 files perfolder.

. Maximum of 1,000 files ona disc.

. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. All files contained directlyunder the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders.

Empty Folders

If a root directory or folder is emptyor contains only folders, the playeradvances to the next folder in thefile structure that contains acompressed audio file. The emptyfolder(s) are not displayed ornumbered.

No Folder

When the CD only containscompressed audio files without anyfolders or playlists, all files areunder the root folder.

USB Port

Playing from a USB

A USB mass storage device orMedia Transfer Protocol (MTP)device can be connected to theUSB port.

The USB ports are in the centerconsole under the armrest and inthe center stack storage bin.

USB MP3 Player and USB Drives. The USB MP3 players and USB

drives connected must complywith the USB Mass StorageClass specification (USB MSC).

. Hard disk drives are notsupported.

To play a USB device:. Connect the USB.. Press the MEDIA button on the

faceplate until the connecteddevice is shown.



While the USB source is active, usethe icons on the screen to operateUSB function:

. t (Seek Previous/FastReverse)

. u (Seek Next/Fast Forward)

. j /r (Play/Pause)

. Z (Shuffle)

For information on how to use thescreen icons, see “Playing anAudio CD.”

USB Menu

Press the MENU knob to display theUSB menu and the following maydisplay:

Browse: Select to display the fileson the USB device.

Tone Settings: Select to adjustBass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See“Tone Settings” under “Playing anAudio CD.”

Auto Volume: If equipped, see“Playing an Audio CD.”

Bose AudioPilot: If equipped, see“Playing an Audio CD.”

Playing from an iPod®

This feature supports the followingiPod models:. iPod nano® (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and

4th generation). iPod with video (5.0 and 5.5

generation). Video is not shown;only audio is supported.

. iPod classic® (6th generation)

. iPod touch® (1st and 2ndgeneration)

There may be problems withoperation and function in thefollowing situations:. When connecting an iPod on

which a more recent version ofthe firmware is installed than issupported by the infotainmentsystem.

. When connecting an iPod onwhich firmware from otherproviders is installed.

To connect and control an iPod:

1. Connect one end of the standardiPod USB cable to the iPod'sdock connector.

2. Connect the other end to a USBport in the center console or inthe center stack storage bin.

3. Press the MEDIA button toselect the source.

iPod music information displays onthe radio’s display and beginsplaying through the vehicle’s audiosystem.

The iPod battery rechargesautomatically while the vehicle is on.When the vehicle is off while aniPod is connected using the iPodUSB cable, the iPod battery stopscharging and the iPod automaticallyturns off.



If the iPod is an unsupported model,it can still be listened to in thevehicle by connecting to theauxiliary input jack using a standard3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.

iPod Menu

Press the MENU knob to display theiPod Menu and the following maydisplay:

Browse: Select to display the filesor songs on the iPod. See “BrowseiPod Media” later in this section.




Browse iPod Media

Use the following to browse:

Playlists:

1. Turn the MENU knob to highlightand press to view the playlistsstored on the iPod.

2. Turn the MENU knob to highlightand press to select a playlistname to view a list of all songsin the playlist.

3. Turn the MENU knob to highlightand press to select the songfrom the list to begin playback.

Artists:

1. Turn the MENU knob to highlightand press to view the artistsstored on the iPod.

2. Turn the MENU knob to highlightand press to select an artistname to view a list of all albumsby the artist.

3. Turn the MENU knob to highlightand press to select the albumfrom the list to begin playback.

Albums:

1. Turn the MENU knob to highlightand press to view the albumsstored on the iPod.

2. Turn the MENU knob to highlightand press to select an albumname to view a list of all songson the album.


Genres:

1. Turn the MENU knob to highlightand press to view the genresstored on the iPod.

2. Turn the MENU knob to highlightand press to select a genrename to view a list of artists ofthat genre.

3. Turn the MENU knob to highlightand press to select to viewalbums by that artist.

4. Turn the MENU knob to highlightand press to select an album toview songs.




Songs:

1. Turn the MENU knob to highlightand press to view a list of allsongs stored on the iPod.


Playing from an iPhone®or iPad®

This feature supports iPhone 3G,iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4, and iPad.

Follow the same instructions asstated earlier for using an iPod.

SD Card ReaderThis vehicle has an SD card port inthe center console.

Set up any SD card while thevehicle is in P (Park).

1. Plug the SD card into the port.

2. Press the MEDIA button toselect the SD device.

If an SD card has already beenconnected, but a different source iscurrently active, press the MEDIAscreen button repeatedly to cyclethrough all of the available audiosource screens, until the SD cardscreen is selected.

Playing Music from the SD Card

An SD card is played the same waya USB device is played. See USBPort on page 7‑14.

Auxiliary JackThis vehicle has an AUX port in thecenter console under the armrestand in the center stack storage bin.Possible auxiliary audio sourcesinclude:. Laptop computer. Audio music player

This jack is not an audio output. Donot plug headphones into theauxiliary input jack. Drivers are

encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is inP (Park).

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cablefrom the auxiliary device to theauxiliary input jack.

If an auxiliary device has alreadybeen connected, but a differentsource is currently active, press theNow Playing screen button on theHome Page, then press the MEDIAfaceplate button repeatedly to scrollthrough all of the available audiosource screens, until the AUXsource screen is selected.

Playing from the AUX Port

An auxiliary device is played thesame way a USB device is played.See USB Port on page 7‑14.



AUX Menu

Press the MENU knob to display theAUX menu and the following maydisplay:




Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)Instructions for using the cell phonemay differ between infotainmentsystems. For vehicles with the CUEinfotainment system, see the CUEinfotainment manual.

Bluetooth-capable systems caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and delete

duplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in thissection.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth-capable cellphone with a Hands-Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Theinfotainment system and voicerecognition are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of theBluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m(30 ft). Not all phones support allfunctions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons on the faceplateand the steering wheel to operatethe Bluetooth system.


g (Push to Talk): Press to answerincoming calls, confirm systeminformation, and start voicerecognition.

i (End Call): Press to end a call,reject a call, or cancel an operation.Press to mute or unmute theinfotainment system.

Infotainment System Controls

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Overviewon page 7‑3.

MENU: Turn to scroll through a list.Press to select the highlighted listoption.

{ (Home Page): Press to go to theHome Page. See Home Page onpage 7‑4.

PHONE: Press to enter the phonemain menu. See Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑20 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑24 orBluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑18.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Use thevolume bar during a call to change



the volume level. The adjustedvolume level remains in memory forlater calls. The system maintains aminimum volume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Overviewon page 7‑3.

Infotainment Controls

5 (Phone): Press the OnStarphone button to access the OnStarBluetooth menu.

CALL: Press the area just abovethe chrome bar and below the CALLscreen button to make a call.

END: Press the area just above thechrome bar and below the ENDscreen button to end thecurrent call.

MUTE MIC: Press the area justabove the chrome bar and belowMUTE MIC to mute the current call.

KEYPAD: Press the area justabove the chrome bar and belowthe KEYPAD screen button toaccess the keypad screen. Turn theMENU knob to highlight a digit andpress the MENU knob to select.Continue this process for all digits.

PAIR: Press the area just abovethe chrome bar and below the PAIRscreen button to pair a device.

DELETE: Press the area justabove the chrome bar and belowthe DELETE screen button to deletea device.

CONNECT: Press the area justabove the chrome bar and belowthe CONNECT screen button toconnect a device that is alreadypaired.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls canbe made using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. SeeOnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Pairing Information. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. Pairing only needs to be

completed once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.



. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone or Device

1. Turn the MENU knob, then pressthe MENU knob to select thePHONE screen button.

2. Turn the MENU knob and pressto select Bluetooth Devices.

3. Press the area just above thechrome bar and below the PAIRscreen button. A four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN) appears on the display.The PIN is used in Step 4.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 2. Thesystem recognizes the newconnected phone after thepairing process is complete.

6. If the phone prompts to acceptconnection or allow phone bookdownload, select always acceptand allow. The phone book maynot be available if not accepted.

7. Repeat to pair additional phonesor devices.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

1. To list all paired devices, turn theMENU knob, then press toselect the PHONE screenbutton.


Deleting a Paired Phone

1. Turn the MENU knob, then pressto select the PHONE screenbutton.


3. Turn the MENU knob to highlightthe phone to be deleted.

4. Press the area just above thechrome bar and below theDELETE screen button to deletethe highlighted device.

Phone Menu

Once a phone is connected andselected, the following may display:

Recent Calls: Press the area justabove the chrome bar and below toaccess the recent calls from theconnected device.

Contacts: Press the area justabove the chrome bar and below toaccess the contacts list from theconnected device.



Keypad: Press the area just abovethe chrome bar and below to accessthe keypad to make a call using theconnected device.

Bluetooth Devices: Press the areajust above the chrome bar andbelow to display a list of pairedBluetooth devices.

Making a Call UsingPhone Book

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone manufacturer’suser guide or contact your wirelessprovider to find out if this feature issupported by your phone.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.

The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on the cellphone to make a call.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:


2. Turn the MENU knob to highlightContacts and press to select.

3. Turn the Menu knob to highlightthe letter group and press toselect.

4. Turn the MENU knob to highlightthe contact.

5. To place the call, press the areajust above the chrome bar andbelow the CALL screen button.

To make a call using the CallLists menu:


2. Press the MENU knob.

3. Turn the MENU knob to highlightRecent Calls and press toselect.

4. Turn the MENU knob to highlightthe contact or the phonenumber.

5. To place the call, press the areajust above the chrome bar andbelow the CALL screen button.

Making a Call

To make a call:


2. Turn the MENU knob and pressto select Keypad.



3. Turn the MENU knob to highlightthe first digit and press to select.Continue this process throughthe number. To call, press thearea just above the chrome barand below the CALL screenbutton.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

To accept a call, do one of thefollowing:. Press the area just above the

chrome bar and below theANSWER screen button.

. Select g.

Declining a Call

To decline a call, do one of thefollowing:. Press the area just above the

chrome bar and below theIGNORE screen button.

. Selecti or do nothing.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call Waiting Call

To accept a call waiting call, do oneof the following:. Press the area just above the

chrome bar and below theSWITCH screen button.

. Select g.

Declining a Call Waiting Call

To decline a call waiting call, do oneof the following:. Press the area just above the

chrome bar and below theIGNORE screen button.

. Selecti.

Ending a Call

To end a call, do one of thefollowing:. Press the area just above the

chrome bar and below the ENDscreen button.

. Selecti.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu-drivenphone system.

1. When a call is active, turn theMENU knob, then press toselect the PHONE screenbutton.

2. Press the area just above thechrome bar and below theKEYPAD screen button.

3. Turn the MENU knob to highlightthe first digit and press to select.Continue this process throughthe number.



Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition)

Using Voice Recognition

To use voice recognition, press gon the steering wheel. Use thecommands below for the variousvoice features. For additionalinformation, say “Help” while youare in a voice recognition menu.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls canbe made using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Pairing Information. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press g. The system responds“Ready,” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1−5 to pairadditional phones.



Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.



3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name to delete isunknown, see “Listing All Pairedand Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone todelete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all available cellphones were paired. This may needto be repeated depending on howmany cell phones have beenconnected.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the DestinationsDirectory.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers all at once with nopauses, then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.



Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and theDestinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all thestored numbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.



Calling 911 Emergency



3. Say “911.”


Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” Thesystem dials the last numbercalled from the connected cellphone.


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press g to answer the call.

. Pressi to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press g to answer an incomingcall when another call is active.The original call is placedon hold.

. Press g again to return to theoriginal call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressi to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press g.2. Say “Three-way call.”



3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressi to end a call.

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press g.

2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:



3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.



Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see“Deleting a Paired Phone.”

Trademarks andLicense AgreementsFCC Information

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for more informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

“Made for iPod” and “Made foriPhone” mean that an electronicaccessory has been designed toconnect specifically to iPod oriPhone and has been certified bythe developer to meet Appleperformance standards.

iPod and iPhone are trademarks ofApple Computer, Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.

Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee,taxes, one time activation fee, andother fees may apply. Subscriptionfee is consumer only. All fees andprogramming subject to change.Subscriptions subject to CustomerAgreement available atwww.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM®service only available in the48 contiguous United States andCanada.

In Canada: Some deterioration ofservice may occur in extremenorthern latitudes. This is beyondthe control of SiriusXM® SatelliteRadio.



Explicit Language Notice: Channelswith frequent explicit language areindicated with an “XL” preceding thechannel name. Channel blocking isavailable for SiriusXM SatelliteRadio receivers by notifyingSiriusXM:. USA Customers — Visit

www.siriusxm.com or call1-866-635-2349.

. Canadian Customers — Visitwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-209-0079.

It is prohibited to copy, decompile,disassemble, reverse engineer,hack, manipulate, or otherwisemake available any technology orsoftware incorporated in receiverscompatible with the SiriusXM®Satellite Radio System or thatsupport the SiriusXM website, theOnline Service or any of its content.Furthermore, the AMBER voicecompression software included inthis product is protected byintellectual property rights including

patent rights, copyrights, and tradesecrets of Digital VoiceSystems, Inc.

General Requirements:

1. A License Agreement fromSiriusXM is required for anyproduct that incorporatesSiriusXM Technology and/or foruse of any of the SiriusXMmarks to be manufactured,distributed, or marketed in theSiriusXM service Area.

2. For products to be distributed,marketed, and/or sold inCanada, a separate agreementis required with CanadianSatellite Radio Inc. (operating asSiriusXM Canada).

Schedule I: Gracenote EULA

Gracenote Terms of Use

This application or device containssoftware from Gracenote, Inc. ofEmeryville, California(“Gracenote”). The software fromGracenote (the “GracenoteSoftware") enables this application

to do disc or file identification andobtain music-related information,including name, artist, track, andtitle information (“Gracenote Data”)from online servers or embeddeddatabases (collectively, ”GracenoteServers") and to perform otherfunctions. You may use GracenoteData only by means of the intendedEnd-User functions of thisapplication or device.

This application or device maycontain content belonging toGracenote’s providers. If so, all ofthe restrictions set forth herein withrespect to Gracenote Data shallalso apply to such content and suchcontent providers shall be entitled toall of the benefits and protectionsset forth herein that are available toGracenote. You agree that you willuse Gracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and Gracenote Serversfor your own personalnon-commercial use only. You agreenot to assign, copy, transfer,or transmit the Gracenote Softwareor any Gracenote Data to any third



party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USEOR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE,OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLYPERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusivelicense to use the Gracenote Data,the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers will terminate ifyou violate these restrictions. If yourlicense terminates, you agree tocease any and all use of theGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and GracenoteServers. Gracenote reserves allrights in Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and theGracenote Servers, including allownership rights. Under nocircumstances will Gracenotebecome liable for any payment toyou for any information that youprovide. You agree that Gracenotemay enforce its rights under thisAgreement against you directly in itsown name.

The Gracenote service uses aunique identifier to track queries forstatistical purposes. The purpose ofa randomly assigned numericidentifier is to allow the Gracenoteservice to count queries withoutknowing anything about who youare. For more information, see theweb page for the Gracenote PrivacyPolicy for the Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and eachitem of Gracenote Data are licensedto you ”AS IS." Gracenote makes norepresentations or warranties,express or implied, regarding theaccuracy of any Gracenote Data.Gracenote reserves the right todelete data from the GracenoteServers or to change datacategories for any cause thatGracenote deems sufficient. Nowarranty is made that the GracenoteSoftware or Gracenote Servers areerror-free or that functioning ofGracenote Software or GracenoteServers will be uninterrupted.Gracenote is not obligated toprovide you with new enhanced or

additional data types or categoriesthat Gracenote may provide in thefuture and is free to discontinue itsservices at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALLWARRANTIES EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,TITLE, ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT.GRACENOTE DOES NOTWARRANT THE RESULTS THATWILL BE OBTAINED BY YOURUSE OF THE GRACENOTESOFTWARE OR ANYGRACENOTE SERVER. IN NOCASE WILL GRACENOTE BELIABLE FOR ANYCONSEQUENTIAL ORINCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FORANY LOST PROFITS OR LOSTREVENUES.

© 2012. Gracenote, Inc. All RightsReserved.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem (Uplevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem (Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Uplevel)The climate control buttons and the touch screen are used to adjust theheating, cooling, and ventilation.

Climate Control Buttons


2. Fan Control

3. OFF (Fan)

4. Driver and Passenger Heatedand Ventilated Seats (IfEquipped)


8-2 Climate Controls


6. Defrost


8. Recirculation

Climate Touch Screen Controls


2. Driver and PassengerTemperature Displays

3. Fan Control


5. A/C Mode (Air Conditioning)

6. Climate Control Selection(Application Tray Button)

7. Rear (Rear Climate ControlTouch Screen)


Climate Control Touch Screen

The fan, air delivery mode, airconditioning, and SYNC settingscan be controlled by pressingCLIMATE on the infotainment homescreen or the climate button in thetouch screen application tray.A selection can then be made onthe front climate control pagedisplayed. See the infotainmentmanual.

Climate Control Status Screen

The climate control status screenappears briefly when the climatecontrol buttons on the faceplate areadjusted. The air delivery mode canbe adjusted on the climate controlstatus screen.

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.



When the indicator light is on orAUTO is displayed on the touchscreen, the system is in fullautomatic operation. If the airdelivery mode or fan setting ismanually adjusted, the autoindicator turns off and the displaywill show the selected settings. Autooperation can be turned offindividually for climate settings.

For automatic operation:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculationlight will not come on. Press@ toselect recirculation; press it again toselect outside air.

OFF (Fan): Press to turn the fan onor off. The temperature control andair delivery mode can still beadjusted.

w /x (Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls): Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver and thepassenger. Press to increase ordecrease the temperature. Pressand hold to rapidly increase ordecrease the temperature.

SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature): Press SYNC on thetouch screen to link all climate zonesettings to the driver settings. Adjustthe driver side temperature controlto change the linked temperature.When the passenger settings areadjusted, the SYNC button isdisplayed when the temperaturesare unlinked.

Rear (If Equipped): Press thisbutton on the front climate controltouch screen to open the rearclimate control screen. The rear

climate control settings can now beadjusted from the frontpassenger area.

Manual Operation

z9y (Fan Control): Press thefan control buttons or the touchscreen fan control, to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Press andhold the buttons or the touch screencontrol to adjust speed morequickly. The fan speed settingdisplays. Pressing either buttoncancels automatic fan control andthe fan can be controlled manually.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation. To turn off the fan andclimate control system, press andhold the fan down button or touchscreen fan control until it is off.



Air Delivery Mode Control: Whenthe climate information is displayed,press the desired air delivery modeon the touch screen to change thedirection of the airflow. The selectedair delivery mode button is lit.Pressing any of the air deliverybuttons cancels automatic airdelivery control and the direction ofthe airflow can be controlledmanually. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

- (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 (Defrost): Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield. Press the0 button toturn on or off. Changing the airdelivery mode also turns thedefrost off.

# (Air Conditioning): Press theAC Mode touch screen control toturn the automatic air conditioningon or off. If the fan is turned off orthe outside temperature falls belowfreezing, the air conditioner willnot run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns as needed.

Automatic Air Recirculation:When the AUTO indicator light ison, the air is automaticallyrecirculated as needed to helpquickly cool the inside of thevehicle.

The climate control system mayhave a sensor to detect air pollution.When using automatic air

recirculation, the air quality controlsystem may operate. To adjust thesensitivity of the air quality sensor,see “Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.

@ (Recirculation): Press toalternate between recirculating airinside the vehicle or pulling inoutside air. The indicator light on thebutton is lit when recirculation modeis active. This helps to quickly coolthe air inside the vehicle or preventoutside air and odors from entering.

Pressing this button cancelsautomatic recirculation. Press AUTOto return to automatic operation;recirculation runs automatically asneeded.

Manual recirculation mode is notavailable when in Defrost or Defogmodes.

Auto Defog: The climate controlsystem may have a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climate



control system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn on theair conditioner. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off oron, see “Climate and Air Quality”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.

Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defogger turns offautomatically after about10 minutes. If turned on again, itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off. At higher vehiclespeeds, the rear window defoggermay stay on continuously.

The rear window defogger can beset to automatic operation. See“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44. When Auto Rear Defogis selected, the rear windowdefogger turns on automatically

when the interior temperature is coldand the outside temperature isabout 4°C (40°F) and below. Theauto rear defogger turns offautomatically after about10 minutes. At higher vehiclespeeds, the rear window defoggermay stay on continuously.

The heated outside rearview mirrorsturn on when the rear windowdefogger button is on and help toclear fog or frost from the surface ofthe mirrors.

Notice: Do not try to clear frostor other material from the insideof the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade oranything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect theradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Driver and Passenger Heated andVentilated Seats (If Equipped):Press J or z to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press C or { to ventilate the driveror passenger seat. See Heated andVentilated Seats on page 1‑8.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation: For vehicles with theremote start feature, the climatecontrol system may run when thevehicle is started remotely. Thesystem uses the driver’s previoussettings to heat or cool the inside ofthe vehicle. The rear defog maycome on during remote start basedon cold ambient conditions. Therear defog indicator light does notcome on during a remote start. If thevehicle has heated or ventilatedseats, they may come on during aremote start. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑9 and Heated andVentilated Seats on page 1‑8.



Sensor

The solar sensor, located on top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

If the sensor is covered, theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.

Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Base)For vehicles with this system, it controls the heating, cooling, and ventilation.


2. Fan Control



5. OFF (Fan)


7. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

8. AC (Air Conditioning)

9. Defrost


11. Recirculation



Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the indicator light is on orAUTO is displayed on the touchscreen, the system is in fullautomatic operation. If the airdelivery mode or fan setting ismanually adjusted, the autoindicator turns off and the displaywill show the selected settings.

For automatic operation:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculation

light will not come on. Press@ toselect recirculation; press it again toselect outside air.

English units can be changed tometric units through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See“Settings” under Instrument Clusteron page 5‑9.

OFF (Fan): Press to turn the fan onor off. The temperature control andair delivery mode can still beadjusted.

w /x (Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls): Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver and thepassenger. Press to increase ordecrease the temperature. Pressand hold to rapidly increase ordecrease the temperature.

SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature): Press SYNC to linkall climate zone settings to thedriver settings. Adjust the driver sidetemperature control to change thelinked temperature. When the

passenger settings are adjusted, theSYNC button is displayed when thetemperatures are unlinked.

Manual Operation

z9 or9y (Fan Control):Press the fan control buttons toincrease or decrease the fan speed.Press and hold the buttons to adjustspeed more quickly. The fan speedsetting displays. Pressing eitherbutton cancels automatic fan controland the fan can be controlledmanually. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation. To turn off thefan and climate control system,press and hold the fan down button.

zNy (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press the air deliverymode buttons to change thedirection of the airflow. Selectingany of the air delivery modescancels automatic air deliverycontrol and the direction of theairflow can be controlled manually.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.



To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

- (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 (Defrost): Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield. Press the0 button toturn on or off.

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the automatic air conditioningon or off. If the fan is turned off orthe outside temperature falls belowfreezing, the air conditioner willnot run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns as needed. When the indicatorlight is on, the air conditioner runsautomatically to cool the air insidethe vehicle or to dry the air neededto defog the windshield faster.

Automatic Air Recirculation:When the AUTO indicator light ison, the air is automaticallyrecirculated as needed to helpquickly cool the inside of thevehicle.

@ (Recirculation): Press toalternate between recirculating airinside the vehicle or pulling inoutside air. The indicator light on thebutton is lit when recirculation modeis active. This helps to quickly coolthe air inside the vehicle or preventoutside air and odors from entering.

Pressing this button cancelsautomatic recirculation. Press AUTOto return to automatic operation;recirculation runs automatically asneeded.

Manual recirculation mode is notavailable when in Defrost or Defogmodes.

Auto Defog: The climate controlsystem may have a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn on theair conditioner. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off oron, see “Climate and Air Quality”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.

Rear Window Defogger

= REAR (Rear WindowDefogger): Press to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off.

The rear window defogger turns offautomatically after about10 minutes. If turned on again itruns for about five minutes before



turning off. At higher vehiclespeeds, the rear window defoggermay stay on continuously.

The rear window defogger can beset to automatic operation. See“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44. When Auto Rear Defogis selected, the rear windowdefogger turns on automaticallywhen the interior temperature is coldand the outside temperature isabout 4°C (40°F) and below. Theauto rear defogger turns offautomatically after about10 minutes. At higher vehiclespeeds, the rear window defoggermay stay on continuously.

The heated outside mirrors turn onwhen the rear window defoggerbutton is on. They help to clear fogor frost from the surface of themirrors.

Notice: Do not try to clear frostor other material from the insideof the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade or

anything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect theradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped): Press M or Lto heat the driver or passenger seat.See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3‑9.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation: For vehicles with theremote vehicle start feature, theclimate control system may runwhen the vehicle is started remotely.The system uses the driver'sprevious settings to heat or cool theinside of the vehicle. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2‑9.

The rear window defogger turns onif it is cold outside.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located on top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

If the sensor is covered, theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.

Rear Climate ControlSystemFor vehicles with a rear climatecontrol system, the settings can beadjusted with the rear climatecontrol buttons and the touchscreen.



Rear Climate Control Buttons

1. Heated Rear Seats (If Equipped)


3. MODE (Air Delivery ModeControl)

4. O (On/Off)

5. TEMP (Temperature Control)

Rear Climate Touch Screen Controls


2. Rear Climate TemperatureControl

3. Fan Control

4. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperatures)

5. REAR O (On/Off)

6. Rear AUTO (AutomaticOperation)

7. FRONT (Front Climate ControlTouch Screen)

8. Rear Control Lockout


Rear: Press this button on the frontclimate control touch screen to openthe rear climate control screen. Therear climate control settings cannow be adjusted from the frontpassenger area.

O (On/Off): Press the O button orREARO on the touch screen to turnthe rear climate control on or off.



SYNC: Press SYNC on the touchscreen to match the rear climatecontrol temperature to the frontclimate control driver temperature.The SYNC indicator light turns on.Adjusting the rear temperaturecontrols will unlink the set driver andrear temperatures. The SYNCindicator turns off.

Rear Control Lockout: Press tolock or unlock control of the rearclimate control system from the rearseat passengers. When locked, therear climate control can only beadjusted from the front seat.

Automatic Operation

Rear AUTO: Press to turn on or off.The air delivery and fan speed arecontrolled automatically. The AUTOindicator appears on the display.If any of the climate control settingsare manually adjusted, this cancelsfull automatic operation.

Manual Operation

SA T (Fan Control): Press orpress and hold the rear climatecontrol buttons or touch screen toincrease or decrease the airflow.Pressing TA when the system isoff will turn the system on. The airdelivery mode remains in itsprevious setting.

+/− (Temperature Control): Pressor press and hold the reartemperature control buttons or touchscreen to adjust the rear passengertemperature. Press + for warmer airand press − for cooler air.

Y /\ /Y (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press the desired modebutton on the touch screen or theMODE button on the rear faceplateto change the direction of the airflowin the rear seating area.

M or L (Heated Rear Seats, IfEquipped): Press M or L to heatthe left or right outboard seatcushion and seatback. See HeatedRear Seats on page 3‑12.

Air VentsAdjustable air vents are in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel.

1. Thumbwheel

2. Slider Knob

Use the thumbwheels (1) near theair vents to open or close off theairflow.



Move the slider knobs (2) to changethe direction of the airflow.

Additional air vents are locatedbeneath the windshield and thedriver and passenger side doorwindows. These are fixed andcannot be adjusted.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.

. Do not attach any devices to theair vent slats. This restrictsairflow and may cause damageto the air vents.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3. To find out what type offilter to use, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑14.

1. Open the glove box completely.



2. Remove the screw on the upperportion of the glove box torelease the tray or tray withattached optical drive (ifequipped). Pull the tray towardyou to remove completely.

3. Locate the access door for thepassenger compartment air filter.

4. Release the two upper latchesholding the access door, thenlower the access door.

5. Remove the old air filter.

6. Install the new air filter.

7. Close the access door andlatches.

8. Reinstall the tray or tray withattached optical drive (ifequipped).

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.



ServiceThis vehicle may have the newenvironmentally friendly refrigerant,R1234yf. This refrigerant has asignificantly reduced global warmingimpact on the environment,compared to the traditionalautomotive refrigerant, R-134a. Allvehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle.

The refrigerant system should onlybe serviced by trained and certifiedtechnicians. The air conditioningevaporator should never be repairedor replaced by one from a salvagevehicle. It should only be replacedby a new evaporator to ensureproper and safe operation.

During service, all refrigerantsshould be reclaimed with properequipment. Venting refrigerantsdirectly to the atmosphere is harmfulto the environment and may alsocreate unsafe conditions based oninhalation, combustion, frostbite,or other health-based concerns.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-22Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . 9-26Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-28

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-29Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-30Automatic Level Control . . . . . 9-31

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . 9-34

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver AssistanceSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

Assistance Systems forParking or Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Active Emergency BrakingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-55Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-56California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-56


9-2 Driving and Operating

Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the CUE manual for moreinformation on using the CUEsystem, if equipped.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑14.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.



If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Variable Effort Steering

Some vehicles have a steeringsystem that varies the amount ofeffort required to steer the vehicle inrelation to the speed of the vehicle.

The amount of steering effortrequired is less at slower speeds tomake the vehicle moremaneuverable and easier to park. Atfaster speeds, the steering effortincreases to provide a sport-like feelto the steering. This providesmaximum control and stability.

If the vehicle seems harder to steerthan normal when parking or drivingslowly, there may be a problem withthe system. You will still have powersteering, but steering will be stifferthan normal at slow speeds. Seeyour dealer for service.

Hydraulic Power Steering

If your vehicle has hydraulic powersteering, it may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid on page 10‑16.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops, or thereis a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered but may requireincreased effort. See your dealer ifthere is a problem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.



Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering Skid —

too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want thevehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.



Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑34.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.



. Keep your eyes moving — scanthe road ahead and to the sides.

. Check the rearview mirror andvehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or even

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain begins to fall,resulting in even less traction. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated with saltor sand.



Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

See Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑25.

Turn off cruise control, on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use Roadside Service.See Roadside Service onpage 13‑5. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) which

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

cannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speed

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

to the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. This

keeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑28.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑74.



Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry: the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way the

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

vehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle center

pillar (B-pillar). With the driverdoor open, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

If the vehicle is a ProfessionalVehicle, the vehicle-specificCertification label is provided bythe final stage manufacturer.The coach-builder should beconsulted if the final stagemanufacturer's label is notpresent. The Gross VehicleWeight Rating GVWR labelshould be on the driver'sdoor edge.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (3) and therecommended cold tire inflation



pressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑34 andTire Pressure on page 10‑41.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle; see “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

If this is a professional vehicle, avehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label will beprovided and installed by thefinal body manufacturer. TheTire and Loading Informationlabel should be attached to theB-pillar. See the final stagemanufacturer's manual orcontact them directly. The labelshows the original tires installedon the professional vehicle, the

recommended cold tire inflationpressures for those tires, andthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs and

there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 9‑63for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules, and trailering tips.



Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight and



seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel, found on the vehiclecenter pillar (B-pillar), tells youthe gross weight capacity of thevehicle, called the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). TheGVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel,

and cargo. Never exceed theGVWR for the vehicle, or theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

If the vehicle is a professionalvehicle, the vehicle-specificcertification label is provided bythe final stage manufacturer.The coach-builder should beconsulted if the final stagemanufacturer's label is notpresent. The Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) labelshould be on the driverdoor edge.

And, if you do have a heavyload, you should spread it out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

If you put things inside thevehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else —they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.



{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. During the first 1 000 km(600mi), avoid using morethan moderate accelerationin lower gears and avoidvehicle speeds above110 km/h (68mph).

. Between the first 1 000 km(600mi) and 5 000 km(3,000 mi), heavyacceleration in lower gearscan be used. Vehicle speeds



above 110 km/h (68mph)should be limited tofive minutes per use.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See DrivingCharacteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑60 for thetrailer towing capabilities ofyour vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The vehicle has an electronickeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.

Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes: ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, and Stopping theEngine/OFF.

The transmitter must be in thevehicle for the system to operate.If the pushbutton start is notworking, the vehicle may be near astrong radio antenna signal causinginterference to the remote keyless

access system. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ON/RUN and the brakepedal must be applied.

Stopping the Engine/OFF (NoIndicator Lights): When thevehicle is stopped, press the engineSTART/STOP button once to turnthe engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑19.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display themessage SHIFT TO PARK in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Transmission Messages onpage 5‑43. When the vehicle isshifted into P (Park), the ignitionsystem will switch to OFF.



Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionOFF. On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must be in P (Park) to turnthe ignition to the OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeElectric Parking Brake onpage 9‑26.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold the engine START/STOP button for longer thantwo seconds, or press twice infive seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (AmberIndicator Light): This mode allowsthe use of some electricalaccessories when the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight): This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Engine onpage 9‑17. The ignition will thenremain in ON/RUN.

Service Only Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, andthe brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will placethe vehicle in Service Only Mode.



The instruments and audio systemswill operate as they do in ON/RUN,but the vehicle will not be able to bedriven. The engine will not start inService Only Mode. Push the buttonagain to turn the vehicle off.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Notice: If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9‑65.

Starting Procedure

1. With the keyless access system,the transmitter must be in thevehicle. Put your foot on thebrake pedal and push theSTART button. When the enginebegins cranking, let go of thebutton.

The idle speed will go down asthe engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

If the transmitter is not in thevehicle or something isinterfering with the transmitter,the Driver Information Center(DIC) will display a message.See Key and Lock Messages onpage 5‑38.

If the battery in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterneeds replacing, the DIC willdisplay a message. The vehiclecan still be driven. See “Starting

the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” in RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the STARTbutton is pressed, and thenreleased when the enginebegins cranking, the engine willcontinue cranking for a fewseconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does notstart and the button is pressedfor many seconds, cranking willbe stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage.To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby pressing the START button asecond time.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by pressingthe START button immediately



after cranking has ended, canoverheat and damage thecranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you press the START button,for up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the button and theaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine and

transmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater,if available, can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18°C (0°F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at leastfour hours before starting thevehicle. An internal thermostat inthe plug end of the cord will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.

The electrical cord is located onthe driver side of the enginecompartment, between thefender and the enginecompartment fuse block.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.



{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Infotainment System. Power Windows. Sunroof (If Equipped). Auxiliary Power Outlet

Power to the infotainment systemwill continue to operate for up to10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.

Power to the power windows andsunroof will continue to operate forup to 10 minutes or until any door isopened.

All of these features will work whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

Shifting Into Park1. Hold the brake pedal down and

apply the parking brake. SeeElectric Parking Brake onpage 9‑26.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pushing the lever all the waytoward the front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition off.

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑19. If you are towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑60.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), holddown the regular brake pedal. See ifyou can move the shift lever awayfrom P (Park) without first pulling it

toward you. If you can, it means thatthe shift lever was not fully lockedinto P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)"listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

If you are towing a trailer andparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑60.

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anautomatic transmission shift lockcontrol system. The shift lockcontrol is designed to preventmovement of the shift lever out ofP (Park), unless the ignition is inON/RUN and the brake pedal isapplied.

The shift lock control is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑71.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

2. Apply the brake pedal.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.



If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9‑19and Engine Exhaust on page 9‑21.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑60.

AutomaticTransmissionThe automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.

P (Park): This position locks thewheels. It is the best position to usewhen starting the engine becausethe vehicle cannot move easily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑19 and DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tipson page 9‑60.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The regular brake must befully applied first and then the shift



lever button pressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition is inON/RUN. If you cannot shift out ofP (Park), ease pressure on the shiftlever, then push the shift lever allthe way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park onpage 9‑20.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine when

the vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If more power isneeded for passing, and thevehicle is:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away.

M (Manual Mode): This positionallows the driver to select the rangeof gears appropriate for currentdriving conditions.



In M (Manual Mode) thetransmission will shift as anautomatic until the Tap Shift controlsare used. Tap Shift activates drivermanual gear selection.

See Manual Mode on page 9‑24 formore information.

Manual Mode

Tap Shift

Tap Shift allows the driver tomanually control the automatictransmission. To use Tap Shift, theshift lever must be in M (Manual

Mode). Vehicles with this featurehave indicators on the steeringwheel. The controls are on the backof the steering wheel. Tap the leftcontrol to downshift, and the rightcontrol to upshift. A DriverInformation Center (DIC) messageindicates the gear the vehicle is in.

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift into2 (Second) gear. A higher gear ratioallows you to gain more traction onslippery surfaces.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature alwayssend engine power to all fourwheels. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

When using a compact spare tire onan AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and disables AWD. To restoreAWD operation and preventexcessive wear on the system,replace the compact spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑70.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑22.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.



Electric Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The switch for theEPB is on the left side of theinstrument panel. The EPB canalways be activated, even if theignition is off. To prevent drainingthe battery, avoid repeated cycles ofthe EPB system when the engine isnot running.

The system has a parking brakestatus light and a parking brakewarning light. See Electric ParkingBrake Light on page 5‑21. There are

also Driver Information Center (DIC)messages. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑35. In case ofinsufficient electrical power, the EPBcannot be applied or released.

Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe parking brake status light toensure that the parking brake isapplied.

EPB Apply

The EPB can be applied any timethe vehicle is stopped. The EPB isapplied by momentarily lifting up onthe EPB switch. Once fully applied,the parking brake status light will beon. While the brake is being applied,the status light will flash until fullapply is reached. If the light doesnot come on, or remains flashing,have the vehicle serviced. Do notdrive the vehicle if the parking brakestatus light is flashing. See yourdealer. See Electric Parking BrakeLight on page 5‑21.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is in motion, a chime willsound, and a DIC message will be

displayed. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑35. Thevehicle will decelerate as long asthe switch is held in the up position.Releasing the EPB switch duringdeceleration will release the parkingbrake. If the switch is held in the upposition until the vehicle comes to astop, the EPB will remain applied.

If the parking brake status lightflashes continuously, the EPB isonly partially applied or released,or there is a problem with the EPB.A DIC message will be displayed.See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑35. If this light flashescontinuously, release the EPB, andattempt to apply it again. If this lightcontinues to flash, do not drive thevehicle. See your dealer.

If the parking brake warning light ison, the EPB has detected an errorin another system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. To applythe EPB when this light is on, lift upon the EPB switch and hold it in theup position. Full application of theparking brake by the EPB system



may take longer than normal whenthis light is on. Continue to hold theswitch until the parking brake statuslight remains on. If the parkingbrake warning light is on, see yourdealer.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked toprevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB, place theignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN position, apply and holdthe brake pedal, and push downmomentarily on the EPB switch.If you attempt to release the EPBwithout the brake pedal applied, achime will sound, and a DICmessage will be displayed. SeeBrake System Messages onpage 5‑35. The EPB is releasedwhen the parking brake status lightis off.

If the parking brake warning light ison, the EPB has detected an errorin another system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. To

release the EPB when this light ison, push down on the EPB switchand hold it in the down position.EPB release may take longer thannormal when this light is on.Continue to hold the switch until theparking brake status light is off.If the light is on, see your dealer.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve parking brake lining life.

For maximum EPB force whentowing a trailer or parking on a hill,pull the EPB switch twice. If you are

towing a trailer and parking on a hill,see Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips on page 9‑60.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. Thebrake assist feature willautomatically disengage when the



brake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After the drivercompletely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill on agrade, HSA will be automaticallyactivated. During the transitionperiod between when the driverreleases the brake pedal and startsto accelerate to drive off on a grade,HSA holds the braking pressure toensure that there is no rolling. Thebrakes will automatically releasewhen the accelerator pedal isapplied within the two‐secondwindow. It will not activate if thevehicle is in a drive gear and facingdownhill or if the vehicle is facinguphill and in R (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a TCS that limitswheel spin. This is especially usefulin slippery road conditions. Thesystem operates if it senses thatone or both of the front wheels arespinning or beginning to losetraction. On an All-Wheel-Drive(AWD) vehicle, the system willoperate if it senses that any of thewheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction. When this happens,the system brakes the spinningwheel(s) and/or reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

The TCS/StabiliTrak light flasheswhen the traction control system islimiting wheel spin.

The TCS/StabiliTrak light comes onand the appropriate message will bedisplayed in the DIC if there is aproblem with the traction controlsystem. When the TCS/StabiliTraklight is on, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light onpage 5‑24.

TCS automatically comes onwhenever the vehicle is started. Tolimit wheel spin, especially inslippery road conditions, the systemshould always be left on, but it maybe necessary to turn the system offif the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,or snow and rocking the vehicle is



required. See If the Vehicle Is Stuckon page 9‑9. See Winter Driving onpage 9‑7 for information on usingTCS when driving in snowy or icyconditions.

The TCS/StabiliTrak button islocated on the center stack.

Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button; the tractioncontrol system will turn off and theappropriate message will bedisplayed in the DIC. Press thebutton again to turn the system back

on. For information on turningStabiliTrak off and on, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑29.

Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect your vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has an electronicstability control system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thesystem senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to help steerthe vehicle in the direction whichyou are steering.

When the system activates, thiswarning light flashes on theinstrument panel. A noise may beheard or a vibration may be felt inthe brake pedal. This is normal.Continue to steer the vehicle in theintended direction.

If there is a problem detected withStabiliTrak, the appropriatemessage displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) and theTCS/StabiliTrak warning light comeson in the instrument panel cluster.When this message and lightdisplay, the system is notoperational. Driving should beadjusted accordingly. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light onpage 5‑24.



The TCS/StabiliTrak button islocated on the center stack.

StabiliTrak comes on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started. Thesystem should be left on to helpassist with directional control of thevehicle.

If StabiliTrak needs to be turned off,press and hold the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton until the StabiliTrak OFF lightcomes on. The StabiliTrak OFF lightcomes on and a DIC messagedisplays. Press the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton again to turn both systemsback on.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow,reengage the cruise control. SeeCruise Control on page 9‑31.

Magnetic Ride ControlThe Magnetic Ride Control monitorsthe suspension system.

Based on road conditions, steeringwheel angle, and vehicle speed, thesystem automatically adjusts toprovide the best handling whileproviding a smooth ride. The Tourand Sport Modes will feel similar ona smooth road.

Tour: Use for normal city andhighway driving. This settingprovides a smooth, soft ride.

Sport: Use where road conditionsor personal preference demandmore control. This setting providesmore “feel,” or response to roadconditions.

The vehicle is normally in TourMode. Sport Mode is engaged whenthe shift lever is placed in M(Manual). When the shift lever isplaced in D (Drive) the system willrevert back to Tour Mode.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)briefly displays the appropriatemessage on vehicle startup or whena new mode is selected. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑41.



Automatic Level ControlThe automatic level control rearsuspension is available on somevehicles.

This type of level control is fullyautomatic and will provide a betterleveled riding position as well asbetter handling under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions.An air compressor connected to therear shocks will raise or lower therear of the vehicle to maintainproper vehicle height. The system isactivated when the engine isrunning and will automatically adjustvehicle height thereafter. Thesystem may exhaust (lower vehicleheight) for up to 10 minutes after theengine has been turned off. Youmay hear the air compressoroperating when the height is beingadjusted; this is normal.

If the compressor runs often forlonger than one minute within thesame trip and the vehicle remainslow in the rear, see your dealer forservice.

If the vehicle is not used for severalweeks, the rear of the vehicle maylook low. When the engine isstarted, the vehicle will return to theproper height.

If a weight-distributing hitch is beingused, it is recommended to allowthe shocks to inflate, therebyleveling the vehicle prior to adjustingthe hitch.

Cruise Control

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

With cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more canbe maintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol disengages.



If the StabiliTrak® system begins tolimit wheel spin while using cruisecontrol, the cruise controlautomatically disengages. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑29 orTraction Control System (TCS) onpage 9‑28. When road conditionsallow the cruise control to be safelyused, you can apply the cruisecontrol again.

J (On/Off): Press to turn thesystem on and off. An indicatorappears in the instrument clusterwhen cruise is turned on.

+RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press the control up briefly toresume to a previously set speed orto increase vehicle speed if thecruise control is already activated.To increase speed by 1 km/h(1 mph), press +RES up to the firstdetent. To increase speed by 5 km/h(5 mph) increments, press +RES upto the second detent.

SET− (Set/Coast): Press thecontrol down briefly to set the speedand activate cruise control or todecrease vehicle speed if the cruisecontrol is already activated. Todecrease speed by 1 km/h (1 mph),press SET− down to the first detent.To decrease speed by 5 km/h(5 mph) increments, press SET−down to the second detent.

* (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control button off when cruiseis not being used.

1. PressJ.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release the SET−control on the steering wheel.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

When the cruise control has beenset to the desired speed, a cruisecontrol indicator appears on theinstrument cluster and a cruise setspeed message appears on theHead-Up Display (HUD),if equipped.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.



Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,press the +RES control to the firstdetent briefly on the steering wheel.The vehicle returns to the previousset speed.

Increasing Speed While CruiseControl is at a Set Speed

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold +RES up until

the desired speed is reached,then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, press +RESup to the first detent. For eachpress, the vehicle goes about1 km/h (1 mph) faster.

. To increase vehicle speed inlarger increments, press +RESup to the second detent. Foreach press, the vehicle goesabout 5 km/h (5 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑9. The increment value useddepends on the units displayed.

Reducing Speed While CruiseControl is at a Set Speed

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold SET− down until

the desired lower speed isreached, then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, press SET−down to the first detent. Foreach press, the vehicle goesabout 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.

. To decrease the vehicle speed inlarger increments, press SET−down to the second detent. Foreach press, the vehicle goesabout 5 km/h (5 mph) slower.

The cruise control system mayautomatically brake to slow thevehicle down.


Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle speed down. If the brake isapplied, the cruise controldisengages.



Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. PressJ.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory ifJ ispressed or if the ignition isturned off.

Adaptive Cruise ControlFor vehicles with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), it allows the driver toselect the cruise control set speedand following gap. Read this entiresection before using this system.The following gap is the distancebetween your vehicle and avehicle-detected directly ahead inyour path. If no vehicle is detectedin your path, ACC works like regularcruise control. ACC uses camera

and radar sensors. See RadioFrequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If a vehicle is detected in your path,ACC can apply acceleration orlimited, moderate braking tomaintain the selected following gap.To disengage ACC, apply the brake.If ACC is controlling your vehiclespeed when the traction controlsystem (TCS) activates, the ACCwill automatically disengage. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) onpage 9‑28. When road conditionsallow ACC to be safely used, theACC can be turned back on.

{ WARNING

ACC has limited braking abilityand may not have time to slowthe vehicle down enough to avoid

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

a collision with another vehicleyou are following. This can occurwhen vehicles suddenly slow orstop ahead, enter your lane,or cross the vehicle’s path. Alsosee “Alerting the Driver” in thissection. Complete attention isalways required while driving andyou should be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes. SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑3.

{ WARNING

Adaptive Cruise Control will notdetect or brake for children,pedestrians, animals, or otherobjects.

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

Do not use Adaptive CruiseControl when:

. On winding and hilly roads orwhen the sensors areblocked by snow, ice, or dirt.The system may not detect avehicle ahead. Keep theentire front of the vehicleclean.

. Visibility is low, such as infog, rain, or snow conditions.Adaptive Cruise Controlperformance is limited underthese conditions.

. On slippery roads where fastchanges in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip.

] (On/Off): Press to turn thesystem on or off.

+RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press the control up briefly toresume the previous set speed or toincrease vehicle speed if ACC isalready activated. To increasespeed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press+RES up to the first detent. Toincrease speed by 5 km/h (5 mph)increments, press +RES up to thesecond detent.

SET– (Set/Coast): Press thecontrol down briefly to set the speedand activate ACC or to decreasevehicle speed if ACC is alreadyactivated. To decrease speed by1 km/h (1 mph), press SET− down tothe first detent. To decrease speedby 5 km/h (5 mph) increments, pressSET− down to the second detent.

* (Cancel): Press to disengageACC without erasing the selectedset speed.

3 (Follow Distance Gap): Pressto select a following gap time (ordistance) setting for ACC. Select agap setting: Far, Medium, or Near.

Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control button off when cruiseis not being used.

Select the set speed desired forcruise. This is the vehicle speedwhen no vehicle is detected inits path.



ACC will not set at a speed lessthan 40 km/h (25 mph), although itcan be resumed when driving atlower speeds.

To set ACC:

1. Press].

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release the SET–control on the steering wheel.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

After ACC is set, it may immediatelyapply the brakes if a vehicle aheadis closer than the selectedfollowing gap.

The ACC indicator displays on theinstrument cluster and Head-UpDisplay (HUD). When ACC is active,the symbol will be lit.

Be mindful of speed limits,surrounding traffic speeds, andweather conditions when selectingthe set speed.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the ACC is set at a desired speedand then the brakes are applied,ACC is disengaged without erasingthe set speed from memory.

To begin using ACC again, press+RES up briefly on the steeringwheel. The vehicle returns to theprevious set speed.

Increasing Speed While ACC is ata Set Speed

If ACC is already activated, do oneof the following:. Use the accelerator to get to the

higher speed. Press SET– down.Release the control and theaccelerator pedal. The vehiclewill now cruise at the higherspeed.

When the accelerator pedal ispressed, ACC will not brakebecause it is overridden.A warning message will appearon the Driver Information Center(DIC). See Cruise ControlMessages on page 5‑35.

. Press and hold +RES up untilthe desired set speed appearson the display, then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, press +RESup to the first detent. For eachpress, the vehicle goes 1 km/h(1 mph) faster.



. To increase vehicle speed inlarger increments, press +RESup to the second detent. Foreach press, the vehicle goes5 km/h (5 mph) faster.

When it is determined that there isno vehicle in front of your vehicle,then the vehicle speed will increaseto the set speed.


Reducing Speed While ACC is at aSet Speed

If ACC is already activated, do oneof the following:. Use the brake to get to the

desired lower speed. PressSET– down and release theaccelerator pedal. The vehiclewill now cruise at the lowerspeed.

. Press and hold SET– down untilthe desired lower speed isreached, then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmaller increments, press SET−down to the first detent. Foreach press, the vehicle goesabout 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.

. To decrease the vehicle speed inlarger increments, press SET−down to the second detent. Foreach press, the vehicle goesabout 5 km/h (5 mph) slower.


Selecting the Follow Distance Gap

When a slower moving vehicle isdetected ahead, ACC will adjust thevehicle's speed and attempt tomaintain the follow distance gapselected.

Press3 on the steering wheel toadjust the following gap. Each presscycles the gap button through threesettings: Far, Medium, or Near.

When pressed, the current gapsetting displays briefly on theinstrument cluster and HUD (ifequipped). The gap setting will bemaintained until it is changed.

Since each gap setting correspondsto a following time (Far, Medium,or Near), the following distance willvary based on vehicle speed. Thefaster the vehicle speed, the furtherback your vehicle will follow avehicle detected ahead. Considertraffic and weather conditions whenselecting the following gap. Therange of selectable gaps may not beappropriate for all drivers anddriving conditions.

Changing the gap settingautomatically changes the alerttiming sensitivity (Far, Medium,or Near) for the Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) feature.



Alerting the Driver

If ACC is engaged, driver actionmay be required when:. ACC cannot apply sufficient

braking because of approachinga vehicle too rapidly.

. A temporary condition prohibitsACC from operating. SeeVehicle Messages on page 5‑34.

. A malfunction is detected in thesystem. See Vehicle Messageson page 5‑34.

When any of these conditions occur,the collision alert symbol on theHUD (if equipped) will flash on thewindshield. Either eight beeps willsound from the front, or both sidesof the Safety Alert Seat will pulse

five times. See “Collision/DetectionSystems” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑44.

See Defensive Driving on page 9‑3.

Approaching and Following aVehicle

The vehicle ahead symbol is locatedin the HUD display.

The vehicle ahead symbol onlydisplays when a vehicle is detectedin your vehicle’s path.

If this symbol is not displaying, ACCwill not respond to or brake tovehicles ahead.

ACC automatically slows the vehicledown and adjusts vehicle speed tofollow the vehicle in front at theselected follow gap. The vehiclespeed increases or decreases to

follow the vehicle in front of you, butwill not exceed the set speed. It mayapply limited braking, if necessary.When braking is active, the brakelights will come on. The automaticbraking may feel or sound differentthan if the brakes were appliedmanually. This is normal.

Stationary or Very Slow-MovingObjects

{ WARNING

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)may not detect and react tostopped or slow-moving vehiclesahead of you. For example, thesystem will not brake for a vehiclethat it has never detected moving.This can occur when a detectedvehicle changes lanes at anintersection or in stop-and-gotraffic and then a stopped orslow-moving vehicle appears.Your vehicle may not stop andcould cause a crash. Use caution

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

when using ACC. Your completeattention is always required whiledriving and you should be readyto take action and apply thebrakes.

ACC Automatically Disengages

ACC may automatically disengageand the driver will need to manuallyapply the brakes to slow thevehicle when:. The sensors are blocked.. There is no traffic or other

objects to detect.. There is a fault in the system.

The ACC active symbol will not bedisplayed when ACC is no longeractive.

Notification to Resume ACC

ACC will maintain a follow gapbehind a detected vehicle and slowyour vehicle to a stop behind thatvehicle.

If the vehicle ahead has drivenaway and ACC has not resumed,the vehicle ahead symbol will flashas a reminder. In addition, the leftand right sides of the Safety AlertSeat will pulse three times, or threebeeps will sound. See ”Alert Type”and “Go Notifier” in “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑44.

When the vehicle ahead drivesaway, press RES+ or theaccelerator pedal to resume cruisecontrol. If stopped for more thantwo minutes or if the driver door isopened and the driver safety belt isunbuckled, the ACC automaticallyapplies the electric parking brake tohold the vehicle. The electricparking brake status light will turnon. See Electric Parking Brake onpage 9‑26. To resume ACC and

release the electric parking brake,press the accelerator pedal andthen RES+.

{ WARNING

If ACC has stopped the vehicle,and if ACC is disengaged, turnedoff, or canceled, the vehicle willno longer be held at a stop. Thevehicle can move. When ACC isholding the vehicle at a stop,always be prepared to manuallyapply the brakes.

{ WARNING

Leaving the vehicle withoutplacing it in P (Park) can bedangerous. Do not leave thevehicle while it is being held at astop by ACC. Always place thevehicle in P (Park) and turn offthe ignition before leaving thevehicle.



ACC Override

If using the accelerator pedal whileACC is active, a DIC warningmessage will indicate that automaticbraking will not occur. See VehicleMessages on page 5‑34. ACC willresume operation when theaccelerator pedal is not beingpressed.

{ WARNING

The ACC will not automaticallyapply the brakes if your foot isresting on the accelerator pedal.You could crash into a vehicleahead of you.

Curves in the Road

{ WARNING

On curves, ACC may not detect avehicle ahead in your lane. Youcould be startled if the vehicle

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

accelerates up to the set speed,especially when following avehicle exiting or entering exitramps. You could lose control ofthe vehicle or crash. Do not useACC while driving on an entranceor exit ramp. Always be ready touse the brakes if necessary.

{ WARNING

On curves, ACC may respond toa vehicle in another lane, or maynot have time to react to a vehiclein your lane. You could crash intoa vehicle ahead of you, or losecontrol of your vehicle. Give extraattention in curves and be readyto use the brakes if necessary.Select an appropriate speed whiledriving in curves.

ACC may operate differently in asharp curve. It may reduce thevehicle speed if the curve is toosharp.

When following a vehicle andentering a curve, ACC may notdetect the vehicle ahead andaccelerate to the set speed. Whenthis happens, the vehicle aheadsymbol will not appear.



ACC may detect a vehicle that isnot in your lane and apply thebrakes.

ACC may occasionally provide analert and/or braking that isconsidered unnecessary. It couldrespond to vehicles in differentlanes, signs, guardrails, and otherstationary objects when entering orexiting a curve. This is normaloperation. The vehicle does notneed service.

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

ACC will not detect a vehicle aheaduntil it is completely in the lane. Thebrakes may need to be manuallyapplied.

Using ACC on Hills and WhenTowing a Trailer

Do not use ACC when driving onsteep hills or when towing a trailer.The performance of ACC whendriving on hills and when towing atrailer depends on the vehiclespeed, vehicle load, trafficconditions, and steepness of thehills. It may not detect a vehicle inthe lane while driving on hills. Whengoing up steep hills, the acceleratorpedal may need to be pressed tomaintain the vehicle speed. Whengoing downhill, especially whentowing a trailer, the brakes mayneed to be applied by the driver toslow the vehicle down. If the brakesare applied, ACC disengages.

Disengaging ACC

There are three ways todisengage ACC:. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Press].



Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if ] ispressed or if the ignition isturned off.

Cleaning the Sensing System

The camera sensor on the back ofthe rearview mirror and the radarsensors on the front of the vehiclecan become blocked by snow, ice,dirt, or mud. These areas need tobe cleaned for ACC to operateproperly.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” underExterior Care on page 10‑76.

System operation may also belimited under heavy rain or roadspray conditions.

Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashesor reduce crash damage whiledriving, backing, and parking. Readthis entire section before using thissystem.

{ WARNING

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. Thesesystems do not replace the needfor paying attention and drivingsafely. You may not hear or feelalerts or warnings provided bythese systems. Failure to useproper care when driving mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage. See Defensive Drivingon page 9‑3.

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals.

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitored bythe system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide you withenough time to avoid a crash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.



Audible or Safety Alert Seat

Some driver assistance featuresalert the driver of obstacles bybeeping. To change the volume ofthe warning chime, see “Comfortand Convenience” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑44.

If equipped with the Safety AlertSeat, the driver seat cushion mayprovide a vibrating pulse alertinstead of beeping. To change this,see “Collision/Detection Systems”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.

Assistance Systems forParking or BackingWhen the vehicle is in R (Reverse),the Rear Vision Camera (RVC) andRear Parking Assist may help thedriver to avoid a crash or to reducecrash damage. Some models mayalso have the Rear AutomaticBraking and Backing WarningSystem, Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA), and/or Front ParkingAssist.

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehiclein the center stack display.

{ WARNING

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectlocated outside the camera's fieldof view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Perceiveddistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not back thevehicle using only the RVCscreen, during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers,or where there could be crosstraffic. Failure to use proper carebefore backing may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.Always check behind and aroundthe vehicle before backing.

1. View Displayed by the Camera

1. View Displayed by the Camera

2. Corners of the Rear Bumper



Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

A warning triangle may display onthe RVC screen to show where theUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) has detected an object. Thistriangle changes from amber to redand increases in size the closer theobject.

On vehicles with the Rear CrossTraffic Alert (RCTA), this trianglewith an arrow may also display onthe RVC screen to warn of trafficcoming from either direction. Thissystem detects objects coming fromup to 30 m (98 ft) from the left orright side of the vehicle. When anobject is detected, either threebeeps sound or three Safety AlertSeat pulses occur on the left or rightside, depending on the direction ofthe detected vehicle.

With URPA, as the vehicle backs upat speeds of less than 8 km/h(5 mph), the sensors on the rearbumper detect objects up to 2.5 m(8 ft) behind the vehicle that arewithin a zone 25 cm (10 in) high offthe ground and below bumper level.

{ WARNING

The parking assist system doesnot detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available atspeeds greater than 8 km/h(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,or vehicle damage, even withparking assist, always check thearea around the vehicle andcheck all mirrors before movingforward or backing.

The instrument cluster parkingassist display has bars that show“distance to object” and objectlocation information for URPA, andon some vehicles, the Front ParkingAssist system. As the object getscloser, more bars light up. When anobject is first detected in the rear,one beep will be heard from therear, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse two times.When an object is very close(<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear,or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front),five beeps will sound from the frontor rear, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times.



Beeps for Front Parking Assist arehigher pitched than for Rear ParkingAssist.

Vehicles with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) have the BackingWarning System, which is designedto help avoid backing crashes. Thesystem can warn of rear objectswhen backing up at speeds greaterthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

The Backing Warning System willbeep once from the rear when anobject is first detected, or pulsetwice on both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat. When the systemdetects a potential crash, beeps willbe heard from the rear, or fivepulses will be felt on both sides ofthe Safety Alert Seat. There mayalso be a brief, sharp application ofthe brakes.

{ WARNING

The Backing Warning Systemonly operates at speeds greaterthan 8 km/h (5 mph). It does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectsbelow the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.In some situations, such as athigher backing speeds, there maynot be enough time for the short,sharp application of the vehiclebrake system to occur. To preventinjury, death, or vehicle damage,even with the Backing WarningSystem, always check the areaaround the vehicle and check allmirrors before backing.

Vehicles with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) also have the RearAutomatic Braking system, which isdesigned to help avoid or reducethe harm caused by backingcrashes. If the system detects the

vehicle is backing too fast to avoid acrash with a detected object, it mayautomatically brake hard to a stop.

{ WARNING

Rear Automatic Braking may notavoid many types of backingcrashes. Do not wait for theautomatic braking to apply. Thissystem is not designed to replacedriver braking, but only acts whenthe vehicle may not stop in time.The system, in some situations orenvironments, may not brake ormay not brake in time to avoid acrash. It does not detect children,pedestrians, bicyclists, animals,or objects below the bumper orthat are too close or too far fromthe vehicle. To prevent injury,death, or vehicle damage, evenwith Rear Automatic Braking,always check the area around thevehicle before and while backing.



Pressing the brake pedal after thevehicle comes to a stop will releasethe Rear Automatic Braking. If thebrake pedal is not pressed withintwo seconds after the stop, theelectric parking brake is set. When itis safe, pressing the acceleratorpedal firmly at any time will overridethe Rear Automatic Braking.

{ WARNING

There may be instances whereunexpected or undesiredautomatic braking occurs. If thishappens, either press the brakepedal or firmly press theaccelerator pedal to release thebrakes from the Rear AutomaticBraking system. Check the RVCscreen and check the areaaround the vehicle beforeproceeding.

Turning the Features On or Off

TheX button on the center stackis used to turn on or off the Frontand Rear Parking Assist, RearAutomatic Braking, and BackingWarning System at the same time.The indicator light next to the buttoncomes on when the features are onand turns off when the featureshave been disabled.

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) canbe turned on or off through theSettings menu on the infotainmentsystem. The parking assist symbols,guidance lines, and Rear CrossTraffic Alert (RCTA) can also beturned off. To turn the RVC system,symbols, guidance lines, or RCTAon or off:

1. On the infotainment system,press the Settings screenbutton, or turn the MENU knobto highlight Settings andpress MENU.

2. Select Rear Camera.

3. Press Rear Camera Display,Park Assist Symbols, GuidanceLines, or Rear Cross Traffic Alertand then select OFF or ON.

Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving thevehicle, Forward Collision Alert(FCA), Lane Departure Warning(LDW), Side Blind Zone Alert



(SBZA), and/or the ActiveEmergency Braking System canhelp to avoid a crash or reducecrash damage.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemThe FCA system may help to avoidor reduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. FCA provides aflashing alert on the windshield, andbeeps or pulses the Safety AlertSeat when approaching a vehicledirectly ahead too quickly. FCA alsoprovides a visual alert if followinganother vehicle much too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within adistance of approximately 60 m(197 ft) and operates at speedsabove 40 km/h (25 mph). If thevehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC), it can detect vehicles todistances of approximately 110 m(360 ft) and operates at all speeds.See Adaptive Cruise Control onpage 9‑34.

{ WARNING

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. FCA does not warnof pedestrians, animals, signs,guardrails, bridges, constructionbarrels, or other objects. Be readyto take action and apply thebrakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving on page 9‑3.

FCA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization. See the“Auto Collision Preparation” portionof “Collision/Detection Systems”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. The vehicle-ahead indicatorwill display green when a vehicle isdetected in front. Vehicles may notbe detected on curves, highway exitramps, or hills; or due to poorvisibility. FCA will not detect anothervehicle ahead until it is completelyin the driving lane.

{ WARNING

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

With Head-Up Display

Without Head-Up Display

When the vehicle is started, thisseries of red lights, or the collisionalert display on the Head-UpDisplay (HUD), will come on toindicate the system is operating.When your vehicle approachesanother vehicle too rapidly, the redlights, or the collision alert symbolon the HUD, will flash on thewindshield. Either eight beeps will

sound from the front, or both sidesof the Safety Alert Seat will pulsefive times.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle-ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you arefollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.



Selecting the Alert Timing

With Adaptive Cruise Control

Without Adaptive Cruise Control

Press the collision alert/followingdistance button on the steeringwheel to set the FCA timing to Far,Medium, Near, or on some vehicles,Off. The first button press shows thecurrent setting on the DIC.Additional button presses willchange this setting. The chosensetting will remain until it is changedand will affect the timing of both theCollision Alert and the TailgatingAlert features. The timing of bothalerts will vary based on vehiclespeed. The faster the vehicle speed,the farther away the alert will occur.Consider traffic and weatherconditions when selecting the alerttiming. The range of selectable alerttiming may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

Changing the FCA timing settingautomatically changes the followdistance setting (Far, Medium,or Near) for the Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) feature.

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts for turning vehicles, vehiclesin other lanes, objects that are notvehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, cleaning theoutside of the windshield in front ofthe camera sensor and the front ofthe vehicle may correct the issue.

Active EmergencyBraking SystemIf the vehicle has Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) it also has the ActiveEmergency Braking System, whichincludes Intelligent BrakeAssist (IBA) and the AutomaticCollision Preparation (ACP) System.



Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

IBA may activate when the brakepedal is applied quickly by providinga boost to braking based on thespeed of approach and distance toa vehicle ahead.

Minor brake pedal pulsations orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the brake pedal shouldcontinue to be applied as needed.IBA will automatically disengagewhen the brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

{ WARNING

IBA may increase vehicle brakingin situations when it may not benecessary. You could block theflow of traffic. If this occurs, takeyour foot off the brake pedal andthen apply the brakes as needed.

Automatic CollisionPreparation (ACP) System

ACP may help reduce crashdamage by applying the vehicle’sbrake system and has a detectionrange of approximately 60 m(197 ft). Braking can only occur if avehicle is detected ahead. This isshown by the FCA vehicle-aheadindicator being lit. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System onpage 9‑47.

{ WARNING

ACP is an emergency crashpreparation feature and is notdesigned to avoid crashes. Donot rely on ACP to brake thevehicle.

ACP may not:. Respond to stopped vehicles,pedestrians, or animals.

. Detect a vehicle ahead onwinding or hilly roads.

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

. Detect a stopped orslow-moving vehicle or otherobject ahead.

. Detect a vehicle whenweather limits visibility, suchas in fog, rain, or snow. Inthese situations, ACP sensorperformance is limited.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

Brake Preparation

When quickly approaching a vehicleahead, Brake Preparation reducesbrake response time by having thebrake system prepared for driverbraking to occur more rapidly.



Automatic Braking

Automatic Braking applies thebrakes, even if the driver has notapplied the brakes, in manyimminent front-end crash situationsto help reduce crash damage.It may even help avoid somecrashes at very low speeds.

Automatic Braking may slow thevehicle to a complete stop to try toavoid a potential crash. If thishappens, Automatic Braking willhold the vehicle at a stop until thebrake pedal is pressed. A firm pressof the accelerator pedal will alsorelease Automatic Braking.

{ WARNING

Automatic Braking mayautomatically brake the vehicle insituations where it may beunnecessary. It could respond toa turning vehicle ahead,guardrails, signs, and othernon-moving objects. This could

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

be uncomfortable and startling. Tooverride Automatic Braking, firmlypress the accelerator pedal, if it issafe to do so.

Automatic Braking can be disabledor reduced through vehiclepersonalization. See the “AutoCollision Preparation” portion of“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑44.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If available, the Side Blind ZoneAlert system is a lane-changing aidthat assists drivers with avoidingcrashes that occur with vehicles inthe side blind zone (or spot) areas.

{ WARNING

SBZA does not detect vehiclesrapidly approaching outside of theside blind zones, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals. Failure touse proper care when changinglanes may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Beforemaking a lane change, alwayscheck mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turnsignals.



SBZA Detection Zones

The SBZA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). This zone starts at each sidemirror and goes back approximately5 m (16 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground.

Use caution while changing laneswhen towing a trailer, as the SBZAdetection zones do not change tobecome longer when a trailer istowed.

How the System Works

The SBZA symbol lights up in theside mirrors when the systemdetects a vehicle in the side blindzone, indicating it may be unsafe tochange lanes. Before making a lanechange, check the SBZA display,check mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turn signals.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror SBZA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is moving forward, the left-or right-side mirror display will lightup if a vehicle is detected in thatblind zone. If the turn signal isactivated and a vehicle is alsodetected on the same side, thedisplay will flash as an extrawarning not to change lanes.

SBZA displays may come on whena passed vehicle remains in ordrops back into the detection zone.

SBZA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization on

page 5‑44. If SBZA is disabled bythe driver, the SBZA mirror displayswill not light up.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

SBZA may not always alert thedriver to vehicles in the blind zone,especially in wet conditions. Thesystem does not need to beserviced. The system may light updue to guardrails, signs, trees,shrubs, and other non-movingobjects. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice.

SBZA may not operate when theSBZA sensors in the left or rightcorners of the rear bumper arecovered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. Forcleaning instructions, see "Washingthe Vehicle" under Exterior Care onpage 10‑76. If the DIC still displaysthe SIDE DETECTION SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE message aftercleaning the rear bumper corners,see your dealer.



If the SBZA displays do not light upwhen vehicles are in the blind zoneand the system is clean, the systemmay need service. Take the vehicleto your dealer.

The SBZA displays may remain onif a trailer is attached to the vehicle,or if a bicycle or object is extendingout to either side of the vehicle.

When SBZA is disabled for anyreason other than the driver turningit off, the Side Blind Zone Alert Onoption will not be available on thepersonalization menu.

FCC Information

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)LDW may help avoid crashes due tounintentional lane departures. It mayprovide a warning if the vehicle iscrossing a lane without using a turnsignal. LDW uses a camera sensorto detect the lane markings. It onlyoperates at speeds of 56 km/h (35mph) or greater.

When the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking, the LDWindicator will flash and either threebeeps sound or three Safety AlertSeat pulses will occur on the left orright side of the seat, depending onthe lane departure direction. LDWwill not warn if the turn signal is onor if a sharp maneuver is made.

{ WARNING

The LDW system is an aid to helpthe vehicle stay in the drivinglane. It does not steer the vehicle.The LDW system may not:

. Provide enough time to avoida crash.

. Detect lane markings underbad weather conditions or ifthe windshield is dirty.

. Detect lane markings and willnot detect road edges.

. Warn that the vehicle iscrossing a lane marking if thesystem does not detect thelane marking.

If LDW only detects lanemarkings on one side of the road,it will only warn you whendeparting the lane on the sidewhere it has detected a lanemarker. Even with LDW, alwayskeep your attention on the road

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

and maintain proper vehicleposition within the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield clean and do not useLDW in bad weather conditions.

How the System Works

The LDW camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LDW on and off, press @ onthe center stack to the left of theinfotainment screen. The controlindicator will light when LDW is on.

When the vehicle is started, theLDW indicator on the instrumentcluster will come on briefly.

If LDW is on, the LDW indicator willappear green if the system detectsa left or right lane marking. If thevehicle crosses a detected lanemarking without using the turnsignal, this indicator will change toamber and flash. In addition, threebeeps will be sounded from the leftor right speaker, or the Safety AlertSeat will pulse three times on eitherthe left or right side of the seat,depending on the lane departuredirection.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

If the LDW symbol does not appear:. The lane markings on the road

may not be seen.. The camera sensor may be

blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.. The windshield may be

damaged.

. The weather may be limitingvisibility.

This is normal operation; the vehicledoes not need service. Clean thewindshield.

Lane markings may not be detectedon curves, highway exit ramps,or hills; or due to poor visibility.

If the LDW camera system does notseem to operate properly, cleaningthe outside of the windshield in frontof the camera sensor may correctthe issue.

{ WARNING

If the LDW camera sensor isblocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or ifthe headlamps are not cleaned orproperly aimed, or if thewindshield is dirty or damaged, itmay not detect the lanes ahead.LDW may not help avoid a crashunder these conditions. Keep theheadlamps cleaned and properlyaimed and the windshield clean.



LDW warnings may occur due to tarmarks, shadows, cracks in the road,or other road imperfections. This isnormal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com. TOP TIERgasoline is only available in the U.S.and Canada.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.



Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑56 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and the

vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑18. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.



For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuel

system and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)



WARNING (CONTINUED)

. Fuel can spray out if therefueling nozzle is insertedtoo quickly. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hotweather. Insert the refuelingnozzle slowly and wait forany hiss noise to stop prior tobeginning to flow fuel

Locate the fuel door. The fuel gaugehas an arrow to indicate the side ofthe vehicle the fuel door is on. Toopen the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

The vehicle has a capless refuelingsystem and does not have a fuelcap. The filling nozzle must be fullyinserted and latched prior to startngfuel flow.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds before removing thenozzle. After initial shutoff, do notpartially remove the nozzle to addmore fuel as this will result in fuelspillage. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑76.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Filling the Tank With a PortableGas Can

If the vehicle runs out of fuel andmust be filled from a portablegas can:

1. Locate the capless funneladapter from under the carpet inthe trunk.

2. Insert and latch the funnel intothe capless fuel system.



{ WARNING

Attempting to refuel without usingthe funnel adapter may cause fuelspillage and damage the caplessfuel system. This could cause afire and you or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged.

3. Remove and clean the funneladapter and return to the storagelocation.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove container fromvehicle, trunk, or pickup bedbefore filling.

. Place container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, and

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

keep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.



Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑74.For towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle such as a motorhome, see Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10‑74.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:. Become familiar with the state

and local laws that applyspecifically to trailer towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500miles), toprevent damage to the engine,axle or other parts.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 miles) trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive)but M (Manual Mode) isrecommended. See ManualMode on page 9‑24. Use a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often.

{ WARNING

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

When towing a trailer:. Do not drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.


. Also adjust the ClimateControl system to a settingthat brings in only outside air.See Climate Control Systemin the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.



Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirrors. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.

This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move your hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument cluster flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument cluster flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.



Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantboils at a lower temperature than atnormal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10‑14.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine.. Shift into a gear.. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See theMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3. Things that areespecially important in traileroperation are automatic



transmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑14.

Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer.. The weight of the trailer tongue.. The total weight on your

vehicle's tires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even thatcan be too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature, andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, and cargoin the tow vehicle must besubtracted from the maximum trailerweight.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13‑3.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers, or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10.



The trailer tongue (1) should weigh10 to 15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (2).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be found

on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10. Make sure not to go overthe GVW limit for the vehicle,including the weight of the trailertongue.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealer forassistance.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If so,seal the holes when the hitch isremoved. If the holes are notsealed, dirt, water, and deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) from the

exhaust can get into the vehicle.See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑21.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well,or at all.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Some electricalequipment can damage thevehicle or cause components tonot work and would not becovered by the warranty. Alwayscheck with your dealer beforeadding electrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑38 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑39.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-10Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-14

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-16Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-20Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-21

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Windshield Replacement . . . 10-22

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-24Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-36Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43


10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-54Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-70Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-71

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-74Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to


Vehicle Care 10-3

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride and

handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑39.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑11.


10-4 Vehicle Care

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑38.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑15.

Notice: Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact thefluids, reservoir caps,or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release lever withthis symbol on it. It is locatedinside the vehicle on the lowerside of the instrument panel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle andlocate the secondary hoodrelease lever. The lever islocated under the front edge ofthe grille near the center.

3. Push the secondary releaselever to the right and raisethe hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenbring the hood from full open towithin 152 mm (6 in) from the closedposition, pause, then push the frontcenter of the hood with a swift, firmmotion to fully close the hood.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Engine Compartment Overview


10-6 Vehicle Care

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑10.

2. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir(Under Engine Cover). SeePower Steering Fluid onpage 10‑16.

3. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑6.

4. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 10‑6.

5. Engine Cover.

6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10‑11.

7. Brake Fluid Reservoir (Out ofView). See Brakes onpage 10‑18.

8. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑12.

9. Battery on page 10‑20.

10. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑71.

11. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑26.

12. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑71.

13. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluidon page 10‑17.

Engine Cover

1. Engine Oil Fill Cap

2. Engine Cover Bolt

3. Engine Cover

To remove:

1. Remove the oil fill cap (1).

2. Remove the engine coverbolt (2).

3. Raise the engine cover (3) torelease it from the retainers.

4. Lift and remove the enginecover.

5. Reverse Steps 1–4 to reinstallthe engine cover.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.


Vehicle Care 10-7

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑9.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑5 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soon

after engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ WARNING

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑5 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


10-8 Vehicle Care

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by the

vehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be used.An oil of this viscosity grade willprovide easier cold starting for theengine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.


Vehicle Care 10-9

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change is

necessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5‑37.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand at this time the system must bereset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Using the DIC controls, locatedon the right side of the steeringwheel, display REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27. When remaining oillife is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON messagewill appear on the display. SeeEngine Oil Messages onpage 5‑37.

2. Press SEL on the DIC controlsand hold SEL down for a fewseconds to clear the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON messageand reset the oil life at 100%.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition on with theengine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message is not on, thesystem is reset.

The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage is off.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluidA transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

See your dealer to have the fluidand filter changed at the intervalslisted in the Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑3.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter islocated in the engine compartmenton the passenger side of thevehicle. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑5.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervals.See Maintenance Schedule on

page 11‑3. If you are driving industy/dirty conditions, inspect thefilter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake it to release loosedust and dirt. If the filter remainscovered with dirt, a new filter isrequired.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑4.


Vehicle Care 10-11

2. Remove the seven screws ontop of the engine air cleaner/filterhousing.

3. Lift the filter cover housing awayfrom the engine.

4. Pull out the filter.

5. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

6. Reverse Steps 2–4 to reinstallthe filter cover housing.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

1. Electric Engine Cooling Fans(Out of View)

2. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.


10-12 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant mixture. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑13and Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑14.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrong

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

mixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.


Vehicle Care 10-13

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If improper coolantmixture, inhibitors, or additivesare used in the vehicle coolingsystem, the engine couldoverheat and be damaged. Toomuch water in the mixture canfreeze and crack engine coolingparts. The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Use onlythe proper mixture of enginecoolant for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or pouring into sewers,streams, or bodies of water. Havethe coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

The engine coolant surge tank islocated in the engine compartmenton the driver side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑5.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe surge tank. If the coolant insidethe surge tank is boiling, do not doanything else until it cools down.If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the markpointed to, add a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant.

Be sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

If no coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank, add coolant as follows:

How to Add Coolant to theSurge Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.


10-14 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.

The coolant surge tank pressurecap can be removed when thecooling system, including the surgetank pressure cap and upperradiator hose, is no longer hot.

1. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise. If a hiss isheard, wait for that to stop.A hiss means there is still somepressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the markpointed to on the front of thecoolant surge tank.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until youcan feel the upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fans. By thistime, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may belower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper mixture to thecoolant surge tank until the levelreaches the mark pointed to onthe front of the coolantsurge tank.

5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an engine coolanttemperature gauge and an enginetemperature light to warn of engineoverheating.

There are also engine hotmessages that may be displayed inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Engine Cooling SystemMessages on page 5‑36.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when one of these warningsappears, but get service help rightaway. See Roadside Service onpage 13‑5.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.


Vehicle Care 10-15

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, the fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Running the enginewithout coolant may causedamage or a fire. Vehicle damagewould not be covered by thewarranty. See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑16 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn it

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

off and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the car in frontof you. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.


10-16 Vehicle Care

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”next in this section.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating modeallows the vehicle to be driven to asafe place in an emergencysituation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheatprotection mode, which alternatesfiring groups of cylinders, helpsprevent engine damage. In thismode, there is significant loss inpower and engine performance.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on in theinstrument cluster, to indicate thevehicle has entered overheatedengine protection operating mode.The temperature gauge alsoindicates an overheat conditionexists. Driving extended distancesand/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should beavoided.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir islocated under the engine cover onthe passenger side toward the rearof the engine compartment. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑5.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

Check the level after the vehicle hasbeen driven for at least 20 minutesso the fluid is warm.

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Set the ignition to OFF and letthe engine compartmentcool down.

2. Remove the engine cover. Referto Engine Cover on page 10‑6.

3. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

4. Turn the cap counterclockwiseand pull it straight up.


Vehicle Care 10-17

5. Wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

6. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

7. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

When the engine is hot, the levelshould be at the hot MAX level.When the engine is cold, thefluid level should be betweenMIN and MAX on the dipstick.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When adding windshield washerfluid to the vehicle, be sure to readthe manufacturer instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating yourvehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The appropriate message willappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) when the fluid level islow. See Washer Fluid Messages onpage 5‑44.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.


10-18 Vehicle Care

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.


Vehicle Care 10-19

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brake

hydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑20.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brake


10-20 Vehicle Care

hydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for battery location.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicals

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

known to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑71 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

Under normal driving conditions,transfer case fluid does not requirechanging or checking unless thereis a fluid leak or unusual noise.If required, have the transfer caseserviced by your dealer.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-21

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Electric Parking Brake onpage 9‑26.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Electric Parking Brake onpage 9‑26.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.


10-22 Vehicle Care

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

It is a good idea to clean the wiperblade assembly on a regular basis.When worn, or cleaning isineffective, replace the wiper blade.For proper windshield wiper bladelength and type, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑14.

Notice: Allowing the wiper arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not be

covered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

To replace the wiper blade:

1. Pull the wiper assembly awayfrom the windshield.

2. Lift up on the latch in the middleof the wiper blade where thewiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough to releaseit from the J-hooked end of thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Windshield ReplacementFor vehicles equipped with theHead-Up Display (HUD), thewindshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the vehicle has to havethe windshield replaced, get onethat is designed for HUD or theHUD image may look out of focus.


Vehicle Care 10-23

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑25.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ WARNING

The low beam high intensitydischarge lighting systemoperates at a very high voltage.If you try to service any of thesystem components, you could beseriously injured. Have yourdealer or a qualified technicianservice them.

After an HID headlamp bulb hasbeen replaced, the beam might be aslightly different shade than it wasoriginally. This is normal.

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.

Back-Up Lamps

1. Back-Up Bulb Socket

2. Back-Up Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Reach under the rear fascia andlocate the back-up lampassembly.


10-24 Vehicle Care

2. Remove the bulb socket (1) byturning counterclockwise andpulling straight out of the lampassembly (2).

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

5. Install the bulb socket by turningclockwise.

License Plate Lamp

Lamp Assembly

Bulb Assembly

1. Bulb Socket

2. Bulb

3. Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the lamp assembly (3)toward the center of the vehicle.

2. Pull the lamp assembly down toremove.

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (1).

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Push the lamp assembly backinto position until the release tablocks into place.


Vehicle Care 10-25

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp W16W

License Plate Lamp W5W LL

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑26, Instrument Panel FuseBlock on page 10‑30, and RearCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑32.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover,squeeze the three retaining clips onthe cover and lift it straight up.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


Vehicle Care 10-27

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

J-CaseFuses

Usage

6 Wiper

12 Starter

J-CaseFuses

Usage

21Rear PowerWindows

22 Sunroof

24Front PowerWindows

J-CaseFuses

Usage

25Retained AccessoryPower

26Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

27Electric ParkingBrake

28Rear WindowDefogger

41Brake VacuumAssist Pump

42 Cooling Fan K2

44 Headlamp Washer

45 Cooling Fan K1

Mini Fuses Usage

1TransmissionControl Module —Battery

2Engine ControlModule Battery


10-28 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

3 Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

5Engine ControlModule Run/Crank

8Ignition Coils —Even (Six CylinderEngine)

9Ignition Coils — Odd(Six CylinderEngine)

10

Engine ControlModule — SwitchedBattery (from EngineControl ModuleRelay)

11

Six Cylinder Engine:Post CatalyticConverter OxygenSensor Heater,Mass Air FlowSensor, Flex FuelSensor

Mini Fuses Usage

13

Run/Crank forTransmissionControl Module andFuel System ControlModule

14Right RearHeated Seat

15Left RearHeated Seat

16Vented Seats Run/Crank

18 Autonet Run/Crank(Aftermarket)

20Heated SteeringWheel

23Variable EffortSteering (ifequipped)

29Passive Entry/Passive StartModule – Battery

30All-Wheel DriveModule

Mini Fuses Usage

31 Left FrontHeated Seat

32Body ControlModule 6

33Right FrontHeated Seat

34Antilock BrakeSystem Valves

35 Amplifier

37 Right High Beam

38 Left High Beam

46 Cooling Fan Relay

47

Six Cylinder Engine:Pre CatalyticConverter OxygenSensor Heater,Canister PurgeSolenoid

49Right High IntensityDischargeHeadlamp


Vehicle Care 10-29

Mini Fuses Usage

50Left High IntensityDischargeHeadlamp

51 Horn

52 Cluster Run/Crank

53Run/Crank for InsideRearview Mirror,Rear Vision Camera

54Run/Crank forHeating, Ventilation,and Air Conditioning

55

Outside RearviewMirror, UniversalGarage DoorOpener, FrontWindow Switches

56 Windshield Washer

57SteeringColumn Lock

60 Heated Mirror

Mini Fuses Usage

62

Ultrasonic RearParking Assist/FrontCamera Module –Battery

64Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL)Module — Battery

66 Trunk Release

67Fuel System ControlModule

69Regulated VoltageControl Sensor

70Vent CanisterSolenoid

71 Memory Module

Mini Relays Usage

7Engine ControlModule

9 Cooling Fan

13 Cooling Fan

Mini Relays Usage

15 Run/Crank

17Rear WindowDefogger

MicroRelays

Usage

1Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

2 Starter

4 Wiper Speed

5 Wiper Control

8 Run

10 Cooling Fan

14HeadlampLow Beam


10-30 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block islocated in the instrument panel, onthe driver side of the vehicle. Toaccess the fuses, open the fusepanel door by pulling down atthe top.

Press in on the sides of the door torelease it from the instrument panel.

Pull the door toward you to releaseit from the hinge.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 OnStar



4 Radio

Fuses Usage

5

Infotainment andCenter StackDisplays, Head-upDisplay, InstrumentCluster, Rear SeatEntertainment

6 Power Outlet 1

7 Power Outlet 2



10Body ControlModule 8(J-Case Fuse)

11

Front HeaterVentilation AirConditioning/Blower(J-Case Fuse)

12Passenger Seat(Circuit Breaker)

13Driver Seat (CircuitBreaker)


Vehicle Care 10-31

Fuses Usage

14 Diagnostic LinkConnector

15 Airbag

16 Glove Box

17Heater VentilationAir ConditioningController

18Pre-Fuse for Fuses1, 4, and 5

19Electronic SteeringColumn Lock

Fuses Usage

20 Automatic OccupantSensing

21 Spare

22Steering WheelControls/Backlight



25Column LockModule

26 AC/DC Inverter

Relays Usage

R1 Glove Box Relay

R2 Not Used

R3Retained AccessoryPower/AccessoryRelay


10-32 Vehicle Care

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block islocated on the left side of the trunkbehind a cover. The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

FuseNumber

Usage

F01 Not Used

F02 Not Used

F03 Not Used

FuseNumber

Usage

F04LevelingCompressor

F05 Not Used

F06 Not Used

F07 Not Used


Vehicle Care 10-33

FuseNumber

Usage

F08Front CourtesyLamps

F09 Not Used

F10 Not Used

F11 Not Used

F12 Not Used

F13 Not Used

F14 Not Used

F15 Not Used

F16 Not Used

F17 Not Used

F18Semi-activeDamping System

F19

Universal GarageDoor Opener/Rain,Light and HumiditySensor

F20 Shunt

F21 Side Blind Zone

FuseNumber

Usage

F22 Not Used

F23 All-Wheel Drive

F24 Not Used

F25 Not Used

F26 Not Used

F27 Not Used

F28 Not Used

F29 Not Used

F30 Front Camera

F31Ultrasonic RearParking Assist/LaneDeparture

F32 Not Used

F33 Not Used

F34 Not Used

F35 Not Used

F36 Not Used

F37 Not Used

Relays Usage

K1 Not Used

K2Front CourtesyLamps Relay

K3LevelingCompressor Relay

K4 Not Used


10-34 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a sudden impact— such as when hitting apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces such assnow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation onpage 10‑43 for inflation pressureadjustment for high-speeddriving.


Vehicle Care 10-35

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10‑35.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not, originally,equipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on snow or ice-coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10‑50.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will decreaseperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. We recommendinstalling winter tires on the vehicleif frequent driving in coldtemperatures or on snow or icecovered roads is expected. SeeWinter Tires on page 10‑35.


10-36 Vehicle Care

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first two

digits represent the week (01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on three


Vehicle Care 10-37

performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑52.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(2) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven atspeeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is foremergency use when a regularroad tire has lost air and goneflat. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire on page 10‑70 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 10‑55.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(5) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑41.

(6) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance


10-38 Vehicle Care

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passenger

vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, power


Vehicle Care 10-39

steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)

before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑41.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that faces

outward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑41 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the tread


Vehicle Care 10-41

of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑49.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑52.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximum


10-42 Vehicle Care

load carrying capacity. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Do not forget to checkthe spare tire. If the vehicle hasa compact spare tire, it shouldbe at 420 kPa (60 psi). SeeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑70 and Full-Size SpareTire on page 10‑71.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaning

the vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Professional Vehicle

If the vehicle has P245/45R19 sizetires, the cold inflation pressure is35 psi (241 kPa).

If the vehicle has 235/55R18 sizetires, the cold inflation pressuredepends on the vehicle mass andshould be determined by the vehiclecoach-builder. A Tire and LoadingInformation label provided by thefinal stage manufacturer should beattached to the B-pillar on the driverside of the vehicle. If the final stagemanufacturer's label is not present,contact the coach-builder. Do notuse the tire pressures indicated onthe General Motors label. These tirepressures are for the incompletevehicle and are not the correct tirepressures for the completedprofessional vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-43

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high-speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

Vehicles with P245/45R19 98V sizetires require inflation pressureadjustment when driving the vehicleat speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) orhigher. Set the cold inflationpressure to 260 kPa (38 psi).

Vehicles with P245/40R20 95V sizetires require inflation pressureadjustment when driving the vehicleat speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) orhigher. Set the cold inflationpressure to 270 kPa (39 psi).

Professional vehicles with 235/55R18 104H size tires requireinflation pressure adjustment whendriving the vehicle at speeds of160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Setthe cold inflation pressure to40 kPa (6 psi) above therecommended cold tire pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label for the 235/55R18 104H size tires.

Return the tires to therecommended cold tire inflationpressure when high-speed driving

has ended. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10 and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑41.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)


10-44 Vehicle Care

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑44.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMS


Vehicle Care 10-45

sensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmits the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lighton the instrument cluster. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflation

pressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑41.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tire

maintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑48, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑48 and Tires onpage 10‑34.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑57 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.


10-46 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message alsodisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑50.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. TheTPMS sensor matching processshould also be performed afterreplacing a spare tire with a roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.The malfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,


Vehicle Care 10-47

using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Place the vehicle power mode inON/RUN/START. See IgnitionPositions on page 9‑15.

3. Make sure the Tire Pressure infodisplay option is turned on. Theinfo displays on the DIC can beturned on and off through theSettings menu. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27.

4. Under the Settings menu selectDisplay Options and then TirePressure using the five-way DICcontrol on the right side of thesteering wheel. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27.

5. Press and hold the SEL buttonlocated in the center of thefive-way DIC control.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message displays onthe DIC screen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

11. Press STOP to turn theignition off.

12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Time

for New Tires on page 10‑54and Wheel Replacement onpage 10‑54.

Four-Tire Rotation Pattern

Use the four-tire rotation patternshown if the vehicle has acompact spare tire. Do notinclude the spare tire in the tirerotation process.


Vehicle Care 10-49

Five-Tire Rotation Pattern

Use the five-tire rotation patternshown for professional vehiclesthat have a full-size spare tireand wheel assembly thatmatches the original equipmenttires and wheels in size, type,and brand.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. See

Tire Pressure on page 9‑10 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑44.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.


10-50 Vehicle Care

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑48 and TireRotation on page 10‑48.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare if

equipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacturer date is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01–52) and thelast two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle for

at least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Spec


Vehicle Care 10-51

number is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑36.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10‑48 forinformation on proper tirerotation. However, if it isnecessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertire's maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, make


10-52 Vehicle Care

sure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑43.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover

may be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑50 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires with


Vehicle Care 10-53

nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels of


10-54 Vehicle Care

performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smooth

road, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

Professional vehicle wheels have aunique offset and bolt hole diameter.Professional vehicle wheels havesix wheel nuts. Non-professionalvehicle wheels have five wheel nuts.See Tire Changing on page 10‑65.


Vehicle Care 10-55

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicle

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

parts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10‑34. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there is ever ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.


10-56 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only for

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

changing a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑5.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.


Vehicle Care 10-57

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tiresafely, follow the instructions below.Then see Tire Changing onpage 10‑65. To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑57.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (1).

1. Wheel Block

2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.

{ WARNING

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.


10-58 Vehicle Care

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire or tire changingequipment, and on some vehiclesthere may not be a place to storea tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) inthe tread area of the tire. It can alsobe used to inflate anunderinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside Service onpage 13‑5.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes:

1. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air orAir Only)

2. On/Off Button

3. Pressure Gauge

4. Pressure Deflation Button

5. Tire Sealant Canister

6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

7. Air Only Hose (Black)

8. Power Plug

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.


Vehicle Care 10-59

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.


2. On/Off Button

3. Pressure Gauge





8. Power Plug

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑5.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑55 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.


10-60 Vehicle Care

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑65.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (6)and the power plug (8).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (6)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (8) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Press and turn the selectorswitch (1) counterclockwise tothe Sealant + Air position.

9. Press the on/off button (2) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (3) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (3). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑41.


Vehicle Care 10-61

The pressure gauge (3) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideService on page 13‑5.

11. Press the on/off button (2) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire,therefore, Steps 12–18 must bedone immediately afterStep 11.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (8) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (6)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/air hose(6), and the power plug (8)back in their original location.

16. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister (5) and place itin a highly visible location. Donot exceed the speed on thislabel until the damaged tire isrepaired or replaced.


10-62 Vehicle Care

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1–11 under “Using theTire Sealant and CompressorKit without Sealant to Inflate aTire (Not Punctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside Service onpage 13‑5.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (5) and sealant/airhose (6) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

22. Replace with a new canisterassembly available from yourdealer.

23. After temporarily sealing thetire using the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:


Vehicle Care 10-63


2. On/Off Button

3. Pressure Gauge





8. Power Plug

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑5.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑55 for other importantsafety warnings.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑65.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (7) andthe power plug (8).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (7) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (8) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.


10-64 Vehicle Care

8. Press and turn the selectorswitch (1) clockwise to the AirOnly position.

9. Press the on/off button (2) toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (3). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑41.

The pressure gauge (3) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure isreached.

If you inflate the tire higherthan the recommendedpressure you can adjust the

excess pressure by pressingthe pressure deflationbutton (4) until the properpressure reading is reached.This option is only functionalwhen using the air onlyhose (7).

11. Press the on/off button (2) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (8) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air only hose(7) from the tire valve stem, byturning it counterclockwise, andreplace the tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the air only hose (7)and the power plug (8) andcord back in its originallocation.

15. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter located ina compartment on the bottom of itshousing that may be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

2. Press the canister releasebutton.

3. Pull up and remove the canister.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitTo access the tire sealant andcompressor kit:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑14.

2. Lift the cover.

3. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise to remove it.

4. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

1. Retainer Nut

2. Jack

3. Wrench

4. Tow Hook (If Equipped)

5. Fastener

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the spare tire cover.


10-66 Vehicle Care

3. Turn the retainer nutcounterclockwise and removethe spare tire. Place the sparetire next to the tire beingchanged.

4. The jack and tools are storedbelow the spare tire. Removethem from their container andplace them near the tire beingchanged.

If this is a professional vehicle, thespare tire and tools will be loose inthe trunk.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑55.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen andremove the wheel nut caps.

3. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen allthe wheel nuts, but do notremove them yet.

4. Place the jack near the flat tire.

5. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-67

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

6. Place the hex tube end of thewrench over the hex head ofthe jack.

7. Place the jack under the vehicle.

Notice: Make sure that the jacklift head is in the correct positionor you may damage your vehicle.The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

8. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire,as shown. The jack must not beused in any other position.

9. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the road tire to clear theground.


10-68 Vehicle Care

10. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

11. Remove the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

an emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

12. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

13. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

14. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

15. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-69

WARNING (CONTINUED)

aftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

17. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.


10-70 Vehicle Care

1. Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise to remove thefastener.

2. Replace the fastener with theone provided in the foam.

3. Turn the wrench clockwise totighten the fastener.

4. Replace the foam, jack andtools, and the tire.

5. Turn the retainer nut clockwiseto secure the tire.

6. Place the floor cover on thewheel.

To store the compact spare tire, usethe shorter mounting bolt.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after being installed on thevehicle. The compact spare tire isdesigned for temporary use only.The vehicle will perform differentlywith the spare tire installed and it isrecommended that the vehiclespeed be limited to 80 km/h(50 mph). To conserve the tread ofthe spare tire, have the standard tirerepaired or replaced as soon asconvenient and return the spare tireto the storage area.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel, and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.


Vehicle Care 10-71

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and thechains. Do not use tire chains onthe compact spare.

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑41 and Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10 for informationregarding proper tire inflation andloading the vehicle. For instructionson how to remove, install, or store aspare tire, see Tire Changing onpage 10‑65.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare is correctlyinflated. The spare tire is made to

perform well at speeds up to112 km/h (70 mph) at therecommended inflation pressure, soyou can finish your trip.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tire will beavailable in case it is needed again.Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep the spare tire and its wheeltogether.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑20.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

The vehicle has a remotepositive (+) location. It is located onthe right side of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview on

page 10‑5. You should always usethis remote positive location, insteadof the terminal on the battery.

The vehicle has a remote negative(−) ground location. It is located onthe right side of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑5. You should always usethis remote ground location, insteadof the terminal on the battery.

These posts are used instead of adirect connection to the battery.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.

3. Set the parking brake firmly.Vehicles with an automatictransmission should be inP (Park). See Shifting Into Parkon page 9‑19.

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-73

4. Turn the ignition to OFF andswitch off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

(Continued)

WARNING (CONTINUED)

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to the jumpstart remote positive (+) post forthe discharged battery.

6. Connect the other end of the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery.

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of the goodbattery.

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to theremote negative (–) post for thedischarged battery.

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: Incorrectly towing adisabled vehicle may causedamage. The damage would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Have the vehicle towed on a wheellift tow truck. A flatbed car carriercould damage the vehicle. Thewheel lift tow truck must raise therear of the vehicle and wheel dolliesmust be used to lift the front wheelsoff the ground.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betraveled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.


Vehicle Care 10-75

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwith all four wheels on theground, the drivetrain

components could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

The vehicle was not designed to betowed with all four wheels on theground. If the vehicle must betowed, a dolly should be used. Seethe following information on dollytowing.

Dolly Towing from the Front(Front-Wheel Drive)

Vehicles with front-wheel drive canbe dolly towed from the front.

Use the following procedure to dollytow the vehicle from the front:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.

3. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

4. Firmly set the parking brake.

5. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight-aheadposition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturerinstructions.

7. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.

8. Turn the ignition to OFF.


10-76 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing from the Front(All-Wheel Drive)

Vehicles with all-wheel drive cannotbe dolly towed.

Dolly Towing from the Rear

The vehicle cannot be dolly towedfrom the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not usepetroleum-based, acidic,or abrasive cleaning agents asthey can damage the vehicle'spaint, metal, or plastic parts.If damage occurs, it would not becovered by the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid usinghigh-pressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washers


Vehicle Care 10-77

exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasive

cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to a high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses andemblems. Follow instructions under"Washing the Vehicle" in thissection.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.


10-78 Vehicle Care

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstripsonce a year. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑13.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as ice

and dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect the front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect the powersteering for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually


Vehicle Care 10-79

check constant velocity joints,rubber boots, and axle seals forleaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion

material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directlyon any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners to


10-80 Vehicle Care

remain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per

3.78 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.

Notice: Cleaning the windshieldwith water during the first three tosix months of ownership willreduce tendency to fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.


Vehicle Care 10-81

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or clubsoda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with a

soft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.


Vehicle Care 10-83

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by button-type retainers.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

1. Pull up on the rear of the floormat to unlock the retainers andremove.

2. Reinstall by lining up the floormat retainer openings over thecarpet retainers and snap intoposition.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured in place.


10-84 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Cadillac Premium CareMaintenanceCadillac Premium CareMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They have up‐to‐date tools and equipment for fastand accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services ‐Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑55.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services ‐Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑3.



Cadillac PremiumCare MaintenanceYour vehicle comes with theCadillac Premium CareMaintenance. It is a maintenanceprogram that covers selectmaintenance services during thefirst 4 years or 80 000 km(50,000 mi), whichever comes first.

Cadillac Premium CareMaintenance covers routinemaintenance services, whenscheduled in accordance with theowner manual, including:. Oil changes based on the

vehicle's oil life monitor system.. Tire rotation every 12 000 km

(7,500 mi).

. Engine air cleaner filterreplacement.

. Passenger compartment air filterreplacement.

. Multi‐point vehicle inspection(MPVI) performed by a qualifiedtechnician.

Cadillac requires that all CadillacPremium Care Maintenanceservices be performed by a Cadillacauthorized service dealer.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑6.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑41.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑48.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑17.



Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑9.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑48.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑6 and Engine OilLife System on page 10‑9.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑12.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑17.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑76. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑22.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑41.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑48.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑10.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑76.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑21.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.



. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑76.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑20.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10‑21.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑21.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Check tire sealant expirationdate, if equipped. See TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑57.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2‑24.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas withheavy traffic, areas with poor airquality, or areas with high dustlevels. Replacement may also beneeded if there is a reduction in airflow, excessive window fogging,or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑11.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

(7) Inspect for fraying, excessivecracking, or damage; replace,if needed.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑11.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

(7) Inspect for fraying, excessivecracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.



AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommendedthat your dealer perform theseservices — their trained dealertechnicians know your vehicle best.Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with a multi‐point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention. The following list isintended to explain the services andconditions to look for that mayindicate services are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break‐down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion‐free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the belts andrecommend replacement whennecessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.



Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi‐point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi‐point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi‐pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through the

rubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑79 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑76.



Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine OilUse only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑6.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑12.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, inCanada 88862807).

Windshield WasherAutomotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 19256084, in Canada 19256085).

Chassis LubricationChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, inCanada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22753242 A3176C

Engine Oil Filter 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 22743911 CF183

Spark Plugs 12622561 41-109

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 65 cm (25.6 in) 25892079 —

Passenger Side – 45 cm (17.7 in) 25882578 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed



DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed


Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the load floor underthe spare tire cover in the trunk, hasthe following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning RefrigerantFor the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System 7.1 L 7.5 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank

Front-Wheel Drive 70.0 L 18.5 gal

All-Wheel Drive 74.0 L 19.5 gal

Wheel Nut Torque 150Y 110 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 Engine 3 Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Drive Belt Routing


12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toCadillac. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service orparts manager, contact the owner ofyour dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theCadillac Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-458-8006. InCanada, call the Canadian CadillacCustomer Care Centre at1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Cadillac,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargemediation/arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesCadillac encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Cadillac,the letter should be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Cadillac Customer AssistanceCenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169www.Cadillac.com

1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCanadian Cadillac Customer CareCentre, Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-888-446-20001-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user can

communicate with Cadillac bydialing: 1-800-833-2622. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.cadillac.com

The Cadillac online ownerexperience is a one-stop resourcethat allows interaction with Cadillacand keeps important vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,required alerts, OnStar onboardvehicle diagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): Viewprintable dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls or search by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12‑1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.cadillac.com to register yourvehicle.



Cadillac Owner Centre(Canada) cadillacowner.ca

Take a trip to the Cadillac OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download owner manuals.

. Find Cadillac-recommendedmaintenance services.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside ServiceU.S.: 1-800-224-1400.

Canada: 1-800-882-1112.

Text Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.Only): 1-888-889-2438.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Service

When calling Roadside Service,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.



. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 6 years/110 000 km (70,000 mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Service is not a part of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.Cadillac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Service program atany time without notification.

Cadillac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide the

claims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Cadillac dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with a sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,

must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is yourresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed during the6 years/110 000 km (70,000 mi)Powertrain warranty period.Items considered are hotel,meals, and rental car.

Cadillac Technician RoadsideService (U.S. Only)

Cadillac's exceptional RoadsideService is more than an auto club ortowing service. It provides everyCadillac owner in the United Stateswith the advantage of contacting aCadillac advisor and, whereavailable, a Cadillac trained dealertechnician who can provide on-siteservice.



A dealer technician will travel toyour location within a 30-mile radiusof a participating Cadillacdealership. If beyond this radius, wewill arrange to have your car towedto the nearest Cadillac dealership.Each technician travels with aspecially equipped service vehiclecomplete with the necessaryCadillac parts and tools required tohandle most roadside repairs.

Services Not Included inRoadside Service. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: Pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders arerequired. Once authorization hasbeen received, the RoadsideService advisor will help youmake arrangements and explainhow to receive payment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the Roadside Serviceadvisor may give you permissionto get local emergency roadservice. You will receivepayment, up to $100, aftersending the original receipt to

Roadside Service. Mechanicalfailures may be covered,however any cost for parts andlabor for repairs not covered bythe warranty are the ownerresponsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.



If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”

furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offerone of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.



Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle was

originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.



Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacement

parts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Service on page 13‑5.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.



. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑32.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision parts

be original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have control

of the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.



Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer AssistanceCenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, call 1‐888‐446‐2000,or write:

Canadian Cadillac Customer CareCentre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Limited1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.



GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, refer to the OnStar®Terms and Conditions forinformation on data collection anduse. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

Push| or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Push = to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

Push| to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.


14-2 OnStar

Push the OnStar Emergencybutton > to get a priority connectionto an Emergency Advisor available24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in most crashes,even if help cannot be requested.

Push > to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations before firstresponders arrive.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped with theseservices. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if it is

equipped with automatic door locks,and can help police locate thevehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

Push| to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from Google Maps™or MapQuest.com. The OnStarmapping database is continuouslyupdated. Visit www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. Push| to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Push = . System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. Push = . System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with addressand the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations from GoogleMaps and MapQuest.com to theirTurn-by-Turn Navigation orscreen-based navigation system.When ready, the directions will bedownloaded to the vehicle.

Destination Download: Push|,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, push the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps visitwww.onstar.com.

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled from a cell phone throughthe OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.See www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.


14-4 OnStar

Hands-Free Calling

1. Push = . System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press = . The system responds“OnStar Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” The system responds“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing. Thesystem responds “911.”

4. Say “Call.” The system responds“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Push = . System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.System responds: “OK, storing<name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Push = and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

OnStar Mobile App

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to your iPhone orAndroid smartphone to checkvehicle fuel level, oil life, or tirepressure; to start the vehicle (ifequipped) or unlock it; or to connectto an OnStar Advisor. For OnStarRemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com.


OnStar 14-5

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If adiagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, push|, and anAdvisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

Push| to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

Push| and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);contact OnStar at 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY1-877-248-2080; or push| tospeak with an Advisor. OnStarservices require a vehicle electricalsystem, wireless service, and GPSsatellite technologies to be availableand operating for features tofunction properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


14-6 OnStar

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyond thecontrol of OnStar may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

Push| for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. The

available dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar.com

The website provides access toaccount information, manages theOnStar subscription, and allowsviewing of videos of each service.Get subscription plan pricing andsign up for OnStar VehicleDiagnostics. Click on the “MyAccount” tab on the home page.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.


OnStar 14-7

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Themanufacturer of the vehiclefurnishes detailed warrantyinformation.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmedto respond in French or Spanish.Push| and ask an Advisor.Advisors can speak French orSpanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock orStolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStarcan contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. Push| to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


14-8 OnStar

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑65. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitiveusers of wireless communicationsare cautioned that the privacy of anyinformation sent via wireless cellularcommunications cannot be assured.Third parties may unlawfullyintercept or access transmissionsand private communications withoutconsent.

OnStar - libcurl and unzipacknowledgments

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software. Beloware the notices and licensesassociated with this software:

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.


OnStar 14-9

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 ofthe Info-ZIP copyright and license.The definitive version of thisdocument should be availableat ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley,Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,

Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existingports with new graphicalinterfaces, and dynamic, shared,or static library versions–mustbe plainly marked as such andmust not be misrepresentedas being the original source.


14-10 OnStar

Such altered versions also mustnot be misrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including, butnot limited to, labeling of thealtered versions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but not limitedto, different capitalizations),“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or“MacZip” without the explicitpermission of Info-ZIP.Such altered versions arefurther prohibited frommisrepresentative use of theZip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its own sourceand binary releases.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Active EmergencyBraking System . . . . . . . . 1-20, 9-49

Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . 9-34Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Adaptive Forward Lighting(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-10Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

When Should anAirbag Inflate? . . . . . . . .3-30, 3-31

Where Are theAirbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26, 3-28

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-17Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38

System Check . . . . . . . . . .3-22, 3-24AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

AlertSide Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . .9-51

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-20, 9-24AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7AntennaMulti-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Assistance Systems forParking and Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Audio SystemBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2


i-2 INDEX

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-22Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-18, 7-20, 7-24

BrakeParking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-20

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking SystemActive Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-24Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-56Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Card ReaderSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

CargoManagement System . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-18


INDEX i-3

CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-48

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54, 3-57Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-6Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

CoverEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Cruise Control, Active . . . . . . . . . 9-34Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . .13-11

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6


i-4 INDEX

DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Rear Seat Pass-Through . . . . .3-13

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-20, 9-24

Driver Assistance Systems . . . . 9-42Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

DrivingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-46Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-24Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Driving (cont'd)Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1, 8-6

EElectric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . 9-26Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-21Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Cooling System Messages . . .5-36Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-22Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7


INDEX i-5

Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-3Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-10Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Front SeatsHeated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-56Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-25Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55Requirements, California . . . . .9-56System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-50Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8


i-6 INDEX

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30Headlamp Leveling Control . . . . . 6-5HeadlampsAdaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Headlamps (cont'd)High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-26High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-27

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-43Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-28Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJackAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-38Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


INDEX i-7

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-36LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-4Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-18Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Lane Departure WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Level ControlAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31

Leveling ControlHeadlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

LightAdaptive Forward Lighting(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7LightingAdaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-20Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-21Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-24

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Lights (cont'd)Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-22Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Service Electric ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-25


i-8 INDEX

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

MMagnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-30MaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-18Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-36Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Messages (cont'd)Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Object Detection System . . . . .5-39Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-41Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-41Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5


INDEX i-9

OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

ParkingBrake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-21

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-21

Parking or BackingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-43

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-34Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-18, 7-20, 7-24

PortUSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-19Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-9Rear SeatPass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6


i-10 INDEX

RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-40Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-21

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Ride Control SystemsMagnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Safety Belts (cont'd)Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-21Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-20

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-9Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-5Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54, 3-57


INDEX i-11

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-20Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Starting the VehicleMesssages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo Management System . . . 4-4Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemActive Emergency Braking . . . .9-49Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .13-15, 7-1SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42


i-12 INDEX

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-17Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . 3-5Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-44Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-43Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Tires (cont'd)Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-54When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-60Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-60Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-74Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-28Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-50Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50

UpdatesSoftware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii


INDEX i-13

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-43Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-65

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-53

Warning LightForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-47Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-22


i-14 INDEX

2 NOTES

2013 cadillac xts owner manual · cadillac xts owner manual - 2013 - 1st - 4/13/12 black plate...

Documents